96 explorer

[PI00700( X)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0090102-B

File:01unpix.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 10:03:21 1996

*[PI00800(ALL)03/95]

thirty-six pica chart:


*[PI02300(ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Safety Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Starting Your Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Warning Lights and Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Instrument Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Electronic Sound Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Driving Your Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Roadside Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Servicing Your Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Quick Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Service Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444


1

Introductory Information

*[IN00300(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00400(ALL)04/95] At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuouscommitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedicationto learning what you want, determination to develop the rightconcept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, andattention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standardby which others are judged.

*[IN00500(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600(ALL)04/95] ■ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of ourproducts and services must be our number one priority.

*[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ■ You are the focus of everything we do. Our work must bedone with you in mind, providing better products andservices than our competition.

*[IN00750(ALL)04/95] ■ Continuous improvement is essential to our success. Wemust strive for excellence in everything we do: in ourproducts — in their safety and value — and in our services,our human relations, our competitiveness, and ourprofitability.

*[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ■ Employee involvement is our way of life. We are a team.We must treat one another with trust and respect.

*[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ■ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We must maintainmutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, andour other business associates.

*[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ■ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct worldwidemust be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible andcommands respect for its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

File:02uninx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996

2

*[IN01010(ALL)08/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide

*[IN01020(ALL)08/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. Thisguide has information about the equipment and the options foryour new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know which information appliesto your vehicle, talk to your dealer.

*[IN01030(ALL)08/95] This guide describes equipment and gives specifications forequipment that was in effect when this guide was approved forprinting. Ford may discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and without incurring obligation.

*[IN01040(ALL)07/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01042(ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information about the subjectmatter you are referencing.

*[IN01044(ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areaswhere carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle orpersonal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people.Please read all WARNINGS carefully.

*[IN01046(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

*[IN01050(ALL)08/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01060(ALL)08/95] After you have read this guide once, you will probably returnto it when you have a specific question or need additionalinformation. To help you find specific information quickly, youcan use the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or the Index.

*[IN01070(ALL)08/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a pagenumber following each item which indicates where detailedinformation can be found.



3

*[IN01080(ALL)08/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in thealphabetical listing for the word that best describes theinformation you need. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. We have designed theIndex so that you can find information under a technical term.

%*[IN01090(ALL)08/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN01100(ALL)08/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or bywriting to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, ServicePublications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y4G3.

%*[IN02400(ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and RecordBooklet

*[IN02500(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the servicesthat are most important for keeping your vehicle in goodcondition. A record log is also provided to help you keep trackof all services performed.

%*[IN02600(ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

*[IN02700(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: BasicVehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, andEmissions Warranties.

%*[IN03100(ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find outabout your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights andresponsibilities.

*[IN03250(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a newone free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer,or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.


4

%*[IN04000(ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN04100(ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a FordExtended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contractprovides service protection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN04200(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle.However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended ServicePlan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealerfor more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan.

*[IN04250(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not takeadvantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time ofpurchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for thedetails.

%*[IN04650(ALL)06/92] Special Notice%*[IN04700( X)11/89] NOTICE TO OWNERS OF UTILITY-TYPE

VEHICLES%*[IN04810( X)11/89] As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this

vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Besure to read the Additional Special Driving Instructions for UtilityVehicles in this book and the special supplement included withfour-wheel drive vehicles entitled 4-Wheeling with Ford.

[IN04815( X)12/95] Although this special supplement is primarily directed tofour-wheel drive vehicle operators, these principles of safedriving also apply to operators of the two-wheel drive Explorer.Even though you may not select a 4WD or AWD option foryour Explorer, many of its operating characteristics are similarto those of a four-wheel drive vehicle. For this reason, Fordurges you to read and understand the contents of the 4-Wheelingwith Ford supplement.



5

%*[IN04850( X)03/95] AMBULANCE PACKAGES

*[IN04875( X)03/95] RWARNING

Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.

%*[IN06000(ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[IN06100(ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-inperiod during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it.During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention tohow you drive your vehicle.

%*[IN06300(ALL)01/95] ■ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brakelinings, you should take these steps:

*[IN06400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when tostop.

*[IN06500(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN06600(ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.

*[IN06700(ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles(160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofhighway driving.

*[IN06750(ALL)12/93] ■ Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to proper torquespecifications at 500 miles/800 km of new vehicle operation.Proper torque specifications are provided in this guide. Alsoretighten to proper torque specification at 500 miles/800 kmafter any wheel change or any other time the wheel lug nutshave been loosened.

%*[IN06800(ALL)01/95] ■ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. SeeEngine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special“break-in” oils.


6

*[IN07000(ALL)03/95] Some vehicles are equipped with a Powertrain Control Modulethat limits engine speeds with a cut-out mode to promotedurability.

%*[IN07100(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

*[IN07110(ALL)07/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint,especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often asnecessary to keep it clean.

*[IN07120(ALL)07/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemicalindustrial fallout.

*[IN07130(ALL)07/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect inpaint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvementin customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Fordhas authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental falloutwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase,whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative.

%*[IN07200(ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[IN07300(ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, witha mild detergent.

*[IN07400(ALL)06/95] DO NOT:

*[IN07500(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN07600(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight

*[IN07700(ALL)04/95] ■ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN08100(ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect thefinish.



7

%*[IN08200(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN08300(ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Donot use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents.

%*[IN08400(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN08500(ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean witha tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner forroutine cleaning.

*[IN08600(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents orpetroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN08700(ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayedrustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing isnot removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.

*[IN08725(ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s side mouldings are painted in lacquer, donot use thinners or solvents to clean them.


9

Safety Restraints

%*[SR00500(ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR00600(ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and yourpassengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canadathe law requires their use.

*[SR00700(ALL)08/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00800(ALL)08/95] ■ the seatback is upright

*[SR00900(ALL)08/95] ■ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR01000(ALL)08/95] ■ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01100(ALL)08/95] ■ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01200(ALL)08/95] ■ the knees are straight forward

*[SR02050(ALL)07/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warninglight may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety BeltWarning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gaugeschapter.

*[SR02100(ALL)07/95] See the following sections in this chapter for directions on howto properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints forChildren in this chapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

%*[SR02200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengers wear safetybelts. Always drive and ride with your seatback uprightand the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

*[SR02500(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lapwhile the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in a collision.

File:03unsrx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996

10


Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies andattaching hardware should be inspected by a qualifiedtechnician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies notin use during a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision,children should always ride with the seatback upright.


Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Neverswing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Neveruse a single belt for more than one person or across morethan one seating position. Each seating position in yourvehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is madeup of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to beused as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision.


Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessenthe risk of the door coming open in a collision.


Safety Restraints

11

%*[SR03000(ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts

*[SR03200(ALL)12/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap andshoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brakehard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locks and helps reduceyour forward movement.

*[SR03400(ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Thenadjust the seat to the position that suits you best.

*[SR03500(ALL)05/95] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the retractor sothat the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder andchest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear asnap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastenedto the buckle by pulling on tongue.

[SR03510(ALL)02/96]

one third page

art:0001196-AFastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts

*[SR03511(ALL)07/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Important Safety BeltInformation at the beginning of this chapter.


12

[SR03512(ALL)06/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021301-AUnfastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts

*[SR03513(ALL)07/95] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original positionto prevent it from striking you or the vehicle.

[SR03515( X)08/95] Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passenger and RearOutboard Seating Positions

[SR03517( X)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor onthe shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safetybelt for the front seat outboard passenger and rear outboardpassengers.

*[SR03518(ALL)08/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in two ways:

*[SR03519(ALL)08/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

*[SR03520(ALL)10/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow theoccupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hardbraking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph(8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also be made to lock bypulling the belt out quickly.


Safety Restraints

13

%*[SR03521(ALL)08/95] Automatic locking mode

*[SR03522(ALL)08/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will beautomatically locked and will remain locked when thecombination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does notallow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode providesthe following:

*[SR03523(ALL)08/95] ■ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.

*[SR03524(ALL)08/95] ■ Child safety seat installation.

*[SR03526( X)08/95] RWARNING

Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in thefront seats.

[SR03527( X)09/95] RWARNING

This mode must be used when installing a child safetyseat on the front passenger seat and rear outboard seatswhere dual locking retractors are provided.

*[SR03529(ALL)08/95] To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to theautomatic locking mode, perform the following steps:

*[SR03530(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR03531(ALL)09/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downwarduntil all of the belt is extracted and, when allowed to retract,a clicking sound is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is inthe automatic locking mode (child restraint mode).

*[SR03532(ALL)08/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt isallowed to retract. This indicates that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.


14

*[SR03533(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckledand allowed to retract completely, the retractor willswitch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lockingmode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.

%*[SR03534(ALL)08/95] Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment

*[SR03535(ALL)08/95] Driver and right front passenger

[SR03538( X)08/95] The driver and right front passenger shoulder belt height isadjustable to one of five (5) positions.

[SR03539( X)08/95] To adjust the belt down, push the release button on the adjusterdown and slide the adjuster down. Then release the button andmake sure the adjuster is firmly in one of the five (5) positions.To adjust the belt up, slide the adjuster up. (You do not have topush the release button.) Slide it up or down until the belt restsacross the middle of your shoulder.


Position the shoulder belt height adjuster so that the beltrests across the middle of your shoulder. Be sure theshoulder belt is properly positioned on your shouldereach time you use the belt. If the shoulder belt is offyour shoulder, on your upper arm or neck, there is agreater risk of severe injury in a collision.

[SR03550(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Be sure the belt is properly positioned on yourshoulder each time you use the belt.


Safety Restraints

15

[SR03564( X)06/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021248-BAdjusting shoulder belt height (2 door models)

[SR03566( X)11/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021249-CShoulder belt height adjuster — full down position (2 door models)


16

[SR03568( X)07/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090168-BShoulder belt height adjuster — full up position


Safety Restraints

17

[SR03570( X)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021283-AShoulder belt height adjuster — mid-way position (4 door models)


Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only.Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Neverswing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Neveruse a single belt for more than one person. Failure tofollow these precautions could increase the risk and/orseverity of injury in a collision.

*[SR03700(ALL)05/95] To tighten the lap portion of the belt, pull up on the shoulderbelt until it fits you snugly. The belt should rest as low on yourhips as possible.


18

[SR03800(ALL)06/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021301-AUnfastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts

[SR03900( X)05/91] The rear seat shoulder safety belts have a feature which allowsthe seat belt webbing to be stowed out of the way when therear seats are folded down (2 door only). To stow the belt whilethe seat is folded, attach the plastic snap on the seat belt to themetal mating part on the plastic trim panel. This will keep thebelt out of the way while the seats are folded. Once the rearseats have been returned to their upright position, unsnap thebelt from the trim panel.


The rear seat belt snap must be detached from the trimpanel prior to wearing the belt.


Safety Restraints

19

[SR04100( X)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020663-CRear combination lap and shoulder belts (2 door model)

[SR05800(ALL)08/94] Center Front Lap Belt (If equipped)

[SR05900(ALL)10/90] The lap belt in the center of the front seat does not adjustautomatically. You must adjust it to fit snugly around yourhips. Do not wear it around your waist.

*[SR05950(ALL)06/95] To fasten the belt, pull the belt across your hips and insert thetongue into the correct buckle on your seat until you hear asnap and feel it lock. Make sure the buckle is securely fastened.

%*[SR06100(ALL)06/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and tip the belttongue at a right angle to the belt. Pull the belt tongue overyour lap until it reaches the buckle.

*[SR06400(ALL)06/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose end of thewebbing until the belt fits snugly.


20

[SR06500(ALL)10/90] To unfasten the belt, push the release button on the buckle. Thisallows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle.

[SR06600(ALL)06/95] Because the center front lap belt does not have a retractor, itshould be shortened and fastened when not in use.

[SR06700(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021123-AFastening and unfastening the front center safety belt


The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possiblearound the hips, not around the waist.


Safety Restraints

21

[SR07900(ALL)10/90] Rear Lap Belt with Retractor

[SR08000(ALL)12/89] Pull the belt out of the retractor with a steady motion and insertthe tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap andfeel the latch engage.

[SR08100( X)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020640-DFastening and unfastening the rear center safety belts (4-door model)

*[SR08500(ALL)05/95] To Unfasten the Safety Belts with Retractors:

*[SR08600(ALL)08/95] 1. Push the release button on the buckle. This allows thetongue to unlatch from the buckle.

*[SR08700(ALL)03/95] 2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its stowedposition. If you do not guide the tongue, it may strike youor part of the vehicle.

%*[SR09600(ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SR09700(ALL)07/95] For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when itis fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to thebelt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost fromyour dealer.


22

*[SR09790(ALL)08/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as thesafety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end ofthe webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extensiononly if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended.Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder beltacross the torso.


Failure to follow these instructions will affect theperformance of the safety belts and increase the risk ofpersonal injury.

%*[SR09900(ALL)08/95] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SR10000(ALL)09/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure thatthey work properly and are not damaged.

[SR10020( X)06/95] The short plastic boot on the front safety belt at the passengeroutboard anchor location covers an energy absorbing sewpattern on the safety belt. In the event of an accident, the sewpattern may release, and the colored label (REPLACE BELT)may become visible. If this occurs, the safety belt must bereplaced.


Safety Restraints

23

[SR10035(ALL)06/95]

33-1/2 pica

art:0021286-BEnergy absorbing sew pattern


24

[SR10040(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

FAILURE TO REPLACE THE SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLYUNDER THE ABOVE CONDITIONS COULD RESULTIN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURIES IN THE EVENT OFA COLLISION.

%*[SR10200(ALL)10/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, frontseat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped),child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), andattaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Fordrecommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehiclesinvolved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision wasminor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do notshow damage and continue to operate properly, they do notneed to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during acollision should also be inspected and replaced if either damageor improper operation is noted.

%*[SR10250(ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR10275(ALL)06/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that isrecommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleachor dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it.

%*[SR10300(ALL)06/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)

*[SR10800(ALL)05/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags are SupplementalRestraint Systems (SRS), provided at these seating positions inaddition to the lap/shoulder belt, and are designed tosupplement the protection provided to properly beltedoccupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. Thesupplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to thelower body.


Safety Restraints

25

%*[SR10900(ALL)05/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts


Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle occupants to beproperly restrained and help reduce the risk of injury ina collision.


All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, shouldalways wear their safety belts, even when an air bagSupplemental Restraint System is provided.

*[SR11100(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use safety belts evenwith an air bag system. Use your safety belts to:

*[SR11200(ALL)01/95] ■ help keep you in the proper position (away from the air bag)when it inflates

*[SR11300(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or rear impactcollisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate insuch situations

*[SR11350(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions that are notsevere enough to activate the supplemental air bag

*[SR11400(ALL)01/95] ■ reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle

[SR11500(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

The right front passenger air bag is not designed torestrain occupants in the center front seating position.


26

%*[SR11600(ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR11700(ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to helpprovide additional protection for you. In order to do this, theair bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are notseated in a normal riding position with your back against theseatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and couldpossibly hurt you as it inflates.

% [SR11800( X)05/95] Important Information About the Right Front PassengerAir Bag

[SR11900(ALL)05/95] It is important for the front seat passengers’ safety that theyremain properly seated whenever the vehicle is moving. Thismeans that small children should be secured in appropriatechild safety seats or infant seats, and all other occupants shouldsit upright, with their backs against the seatback, and restrainedby lap and shoulder belts. No passenger should sit toward thefront edge of the seat, or stand or lean near the air bag cover(which is near the glove box).

*[SR12000( X)08/95] RWARNING

If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, aninflating air bag could cause serious injury.

*[SR12100( X)07/95] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is closer to the airbag. The force of the rapidly inflating air bag could push thetop of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback or centerarmrests (if so equipped), or center console (if so equipped).REAR-FACING INFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BESECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety seatsand infant seats should be secured in the rear seat wheneverpossible.


Safety Restraints

27

*[SR12290( X)07/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag.Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.Front passengers, especially children and small adults, mustnever sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glovecompartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the airbag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sitwith their backs against the seatback, move the seat to the mostrearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child orinfant seats.

%*[SR12300( X)07/95] RWARNING

When using forward-facing child seats move thepassenger seat as far back from the instrument panel aspossible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANTSEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT.

*[SR12310( X)11/95] The force of the rapidly inflating passenger air bag could pushthe top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,armrests or console. Rear-facing infant seats must always besecured in the rear seat.

*[SR12400( X)07/95] RWARNING

Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near theair bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areasthat may come in contact with a deploying air bag.Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a collision.

*[SR12500( X)08/95] For additional important safety information on the proper use ofseat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the othersections of this chapter of the Owner Guide, especially sectionsentitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children.


28

*[SR12600( X)07/95] For further information about the proper mounting ofequipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’sbrochure entitled Some Important Information About Air BagSupplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by callingHelm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602.

%*[SR12700(ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint SystemOperates

*[SR12800( X)06/95] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System consists of thedriver and passenger air bags, impact sensors, a systemdiagnostic module, a readiness light and tone, and the electricalwiring which connects the components.

[SR12900(ALL)06/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering wheel. Theright front passenger seat air bag (if equipped) is in the upperright hand section of the instrument panel ledge above theglove compartment.


Safety Restraints

29

[SR13000( X)08/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021130-BThe location of the air bag and warning labels

*[SR13010(ALL)07/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impactand activate the air bags if necessary. The air bag system isdesigned to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions moresevere than hitting a parked vehicle (of similar size and weight)head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontalcollisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate theair bag.

*[SR13020(ALL)12/95] When the sensors activate the system, the air bags inflaterapidly, filling with non-toxic nitrogen gas in a fraction of asecond. Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflate byreleasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes. The wholeprocess takes place in a matter of seconds.


30


Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Donot touch them after inflation.

%*[SR13050(ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light on the instrumentcluster and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Whenyou turn the ignition key to the ON position, this light willilluminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off.This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE:Maintenance of the air bag system is not required.

*[SR13060(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050087-AInflated driver-side air bag


Safety Restraints

31

*[SR13070(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0050088-AInflated passenger-side air bag


If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOTFUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACEDIMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, theunrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR13090(ALL)07/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate as intended in acrash, the system is equipped with a diagnostic module, whichcontrols a readiness lamp and a warning tone. The diagnosticmodule monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system,the air bag readiness light, the air bag power, and the air baginflators.


32

%*[SR13100(ALL)06/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of thefollowing:

*[SR13125(ALL)06/95] ■ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,

*[SR13150(ALL)06/95] ■ or it will not light immediately after ignition is turned on,

*[SR13175(ALL)06/95] ■ or a group of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern willrepeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired.

[SR13225(ALL)08/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bag system servicedat your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unlessserviced, the air bag supplemental restraint system may notfunction properly in the event of a collision.


Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air BagSupplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

%*[SR13680(ALL)07/95] Disposal of supplemental air bag equipped vehicles

*[SR13700(ALL)06/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see yourlocal Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST bedisposed of by qualified personnel.

%*[SR14300(ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR14400(ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safetyrestraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle —this generally includes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you mustput them in safety seats that are made specially for children.Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for thesechildren. Check your local and state laws for specificrequirements.


Safety Restraints

33


Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lapwhile the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in a collision.


To prevent the risk of injury, make sure children sitwhere they can be properly restrained.

*[SR14625( X)12/95] RWARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, insideor outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.

*[SR14630( X)09/95] RWARNING

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safety belts.

*[SR14635( X)09/95] RWARNING

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.


34


Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle thathas been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn asmall child. Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle.

%*[SR15040( X)08/95] Built-In Child Seat (If equipped)

[SR15045( X)07/95] The rear seat may include an optional built-in child safety seat(passenger side). Refer to Figures 1 and 2. This child restraint isto be used only by children who are at least one year old,weight between 20 and 60 pounds (9 and 27 kilograms) andwhose shoulders (top) are below the bottom of the headrest inthe full up position. If your child is less than one year old orweighs less than 20 pounds (9 kilograms), always use a rear orfacing infant or child seat because a child of that size is notsufficiently developed to withstand crash forces in a front facingposition.

[SR15050( X)10/94] If your child is less than one year old but is too big for aninfant seat, use a convertible child safety seat placed in the rearfacing mode.


Safety Restraints

35

[SR15060( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090171-BFigure 1: Built-in child safety seat in the closed position


36

[SR15065( X)05/95]

24 pica art:0090172-A

Figure 2: Built-in child safety seat in the open position

*[SR15070( X)08/95] Children must be properly buckled before riding in the vehicle.It is the law in every state and province. This child seatconforms to all Federal/Canadian motor vehicle safetystandards.

[SR15075( X)10/94] Frequently check the child seat’s lap and shoulder harness beltsfor correct placement and tightness. Use only if the harness beltscan be pulled snug and will stay snug. If belts do not stay snug,return to dealer for repair.


Safety Restraints

37

*[SR15080( X)12/95] Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided withthis child seat snugly around your child.

*[SR15085( X)08/95] RWARNING


*[SR15090( X)08/95] RWARNING


*[SR15095( X)08/95] RWARNING

Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of thischild restraint system can result in your child striking thevehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash.

[SR15100( X)08/94] How to Use Built-In Child Safety Seat

[SR15105( X)08/94] Read the following procedures and all of the labels on theBuilt-In Child Seat before using the seat. Refer to Figures 1through 14.


Never use the Built-In Child Seat as a booster cushionwith the adult lap belt. The five-point belt harness of theBuilt-In Seat provides much more secure restraint than alap belt. Children who are the proper size to use theBuilt-In Child Seat should use the five-point belts.Children who sit in the right rear seat but are too largeto use the Built-In Child Seat should use the lap/shoulderbelt, but should sit on the seat cushion rather than on thebuilt-in seat.


38

[SR15120( X)10/94] 1. To release the head restraint, grasp the pull strap and pulltoward you (approximately one inch), which will allow youto insert your hand at the bottom of the head restraint, asshown in Figure 3.

[SR15125( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090173-AFigure 3: Releasing the child safety seat head restraint


Safety Restraints

39

[SR15130( X)08/94] 2. Release strap and slide the head restraint to the full upposition. Refer to Figure 4.

[SR15135( X)05/95]

24 pica art:0090174-A

Figure 4: Positioning child safety seat head restraint and release of child seatcushion

[SR15140( X)08/94] 3. Pull both velcro straps to release the child seat cushion.Refer to Figure 4.


40

[SR15145( X)06/95] 4. Lower the child seat cushion onto the adult seat cushion.Read the information and warnings carefully on the childseat cushion protector flap and shoulder safety belt. Checkthe child’s size, weight and age to be sure that the child isnot too small or too large for the seat. Refer to Figure 5.

[SR15150( X)10/94]

24 pica art:0021291-A

Figure 5: Child seat information and warnings


Safety Restraints

41

[SR15160( X)08/94] 5. Unfold cushion protector flap onto adult seat cushion. Referto Figures 5 and 6.

[SR15165( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090175-AFigure 6: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child


42

[SR15170( X)06/95] 6. Place child on the child seat cushion. Then position the rightshoulder belt over the child’s shoulder as shown in Figure 6.Insert the right safety belt tongue into the single opening ofthe crotch safety belt buckle as shown in Figure 7.

[SR15175( X)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090177-AFigure 7: Fastening the crotch safety belt

[SR15180( X)09/95] NOTE: Read the following steps carefully to become familiarwith the color indicator windows located on eachsafety belt tongue and the chest clip. When either ofthe tongues or the chest clip is unfastened, the colorred appears. When the tongues and/or the chest clipsare properly fastened, the color green appears.


Safety Restraints

43

[SR15185( X)06/95] 7. Position the left shoulder belt over the child’s shoulder andinsert the left tongue into the buckle as shown in Figure 8.The color green must appear in the color indicator windowon each buckled tongue.

[SR15187( X)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090176-AFigure 8: Fastening the crotch safety belt


44

[SR15189( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090178-AFigure 9: Fastening the chest clip

[SR15190( X)08/94] 8. Pull on both safety belt tongues to be sure that both tonguesare latched.

*[SR15195( X)08/95] RWARNING

If both tongues do not latch in the buckle, do not use thechild seat. See your dealer for repairs.


Safety Restraints

45

[SR15200( X)10/94] 9. Fasten both halves of the chest clip below the child’sshoulders and adjust the clip (up or down) to comfortablyhold the shoulder belts in place on the child’s chest. Theindicator on the chest clip will show green when the clip islatched. (The purpose of this clip is to position the shoulderbelts correctly on the child’s shoulders.) The clip can beeasily pulled apart and is designed to pull apart during acollision. The clip will help keep the shoulder belts on theshoulders of a sleeping or squirming child. Refer to Figures10 and 11.

[SR15205( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090179-AFigure 10


46

[SR15210( X)05/95]

24 pica art:0090180-A

Figure 11: Fastening the chest clip


Safety Restraints

47

[SR15220( X)10/94] 10. Tug on the crotch safety belt buckle and the chest clip toensure they are properly fastened. Refer to Figure 12.

[SR15225( X)06/95]

24 pica art:0090183-B

Figure 12: Securing the chest clip


48

[SR15230( X)06/95] 11. If the child is sleeping or tries to get out of the child seat,pull shoulder belts fully out to put the retractor into the lockmode. At this time, the shoulder belts are in an automaticlock mode. Allow belts to tighten snugly against the child’sshoulders. The belt will automatically lock and cannot bepulled out. Refer to Figure 13.

[SR15232( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090181-AFigure 13: Checking for properly fastened chest clip and safety belts


Safety Restraints

49

[SR15240( X)08/94] 12. When properly used, the child safety seat should look likeFigure 14.

[SR15245( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090182-AFigure 14: Built-in child seat properly being used

[SR15246( X)08/95] Built-In Child Seat Belt Retractors

[SR15247( X)10/94] The belts on the Built-In Child Seat are equipped with a duallocking mode retractor. The child seat belts can be used withthe retractor in either the emergency locking mode or theautomatic mode. In the emergency locking mode, the retractorallows freedom of movement, locking only on hard braking,hard cornering, or collisions. In the automatic locking mode, theretractor will remain locked and does not allow the childfreedom of movement.

*[SR15248( X)06/95] The retractor will switch from the emergency locking mode tothe automatic locking mode when the shoulder belts are pulledall the way out. The retractor will switch back to emergency


50

locking mode when the belts are unbuckled and the shoulderbelts retract completely.

*[SR15249( X)04/95] The automatic locking mode must be used to hold smallchildren in position, particularly sleeping children and thosewho may try to squirm out of the belts. The emergency lockingmode is also used while buckling the belts.

[SR15250( X)10/94] Frequently check the child seat’s lap and shoulder harness beltsfor correct placement and tightness. Use the child seat only ifthe harness belts will stay snug when belts are placed into thelock mode with a child in the seat. If not, take the child seat tothe dealer for repair.

*[SR15251( X)12/95] Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided withthis child seat snugly around your child.

*[SR15252( X)08/95] RWARNING


*[SR15253( X)08/95] RWARNING


*[SR15254( X)08/95] RWARNING

Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of thischild restraint system can result in your child striking thevehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash.


Safety Restraints

51

*[SR15257( X)08/95] To remove the child from the built-in child seat:

[SR15258( X)10/94] 1. Open the chest clip. Refer back to Figure 9.

[SR15260( X)08/94] 2. Press release button on the crotch safety buckle. Refer backto Figure 8.

[SR15265( X)08/94] 3. Slide the shoulder safety belts off the child’s shoulders andremove the child from the seat. Refer to Figure 6.

[SR15270( X)01/95] To fold up the built-in child safety seat:

[SR15271( X)06/95] Make sure belts have fully retracted to the stowed positionbefore stowing the child safety seat.

[SR15273( X)02/96] NOTE: The seatback cannot be folded down unless the childsafety seat is fully stowed.

[SR15275( X)08/94] 1. Fold the protector flap over the child’s seat cushion. Refer toFigure 5.

[SR15280( X)08/94] 2. Rotate the child seat cushion upward, securing both velcrostraps. Refer to Figure 4.

[SR15285( X)08/94] 3. Slide the head restraint down until it is flush with the top ofthe adult seatback. Refer to Figure 4.

[SR15290( X)09/95] NOTE: When the child’s safety seat is not in use, it may befolded up so that an adult may use the vehicle’s rearseat. Refer to Figure 1.


52

*[SR15295( X)08/95] Inspection after a collision


All built-in child restraints, including seats, buckles,retractors, seat latches, interlocks, and attaching hardwareshould be inspected by a qualified dealer technician afterany collision. If the child seat was in use during acollision, Ford recommends replacing it. However, if thecollision was minor and a qualified technician finds thatthe child restraints do not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to be replaced.Built-In Child Seats not in use during a collision shouldalso be inspected and replaced if either damage orimproper operation is noted.

%*[SR15300( X)08/95] Cleaning

[SR15302( X)01/95] Your built-in child seat may be cleaned with mild soap andwater. Do not use household cleaners as they may weaken thewebbing or damage the plastic parts. For your convenience, theliner is made to be machine washable and air dried (do not useheat).

*[SR15305( X)08/95] Built-in child seat maintenance

*[SR15307( X)05/95] Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder belts system of yourchild seat. See your Ford Dealer if the shoulder belt webbing isfrayed, or if the buckle and tongue are damaged and/or do notfunction properly.

%*[SR15900(ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR16000(ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weightof the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’sinstructions when installing and using the safety seat.

*[SR16015(ALL)08/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a toptether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating positionwhich is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more


Safety Restraints

53

information on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats WithTether Straps in this chapter.

*[SR16025(ALL)08/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correctsafety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure thetongue is securely fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lapbelt combination with a sliding tongue, make sure the retractoris in the automatic locking mode.

*[SR16090(ALL)07/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the childoccupying the seat may be injured during a collision orsudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.

*[SR16140( X)06/95] Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) should use child orinfant seats. Forward facing child seats must have the passengerseat moved as far back from the instrument panel as possible.

%*[SR16150( X)05/95] RWARNING

REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BEUSED IN THE FRONT SEAT. REAR-FACING INFANTSEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REARSEAT. Failure to follow these instructions could result inserious injury.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructionsincluded with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. Ifyou do not install and use the safety seat properly, thechild may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.


54


Seatbacks should be upright for use with child safetyseats.


Always keep the buckle release button pointing upwardand away from the child seat, with the tongue betweenthe child seat and the release button as shown in thefollowing illustration.

[SR16280(ALL)06/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011286-A


Safety Restraints

55

[SR16290( X)02/96] Safety Seats for Children[SR16300( X)02/96] Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight

of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’sinstructions when installing and using a safety seat.

*[SR16310(ALL)02/96] When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle.Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seatingpositions.

[SR16320( X)02/96] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a toptether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating positionwhich is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For moreinformation on top tether straps see your Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer.

[SR16330( X)02/93] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correctsafety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure thetongue is securely fastened in the buckle.

[SR16340( X)02/96] Children weighing less than 40 lb. (18 kg) should use child orinfant seats. Forward facing child seats must have the passengerseat moved as far back from the instrument panel as possible.


REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BEPLACED IN THE FRONT SEAT. REAR-FACINGINFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THEREAR SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions couldresult in serious injury.

[SR16360( X)02/96] All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


56


If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the childoccupying the seat may be injured during a collision orsudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructionsincluded with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. Ifyou do not install and use the safety seat properly, thechild may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.


Always keep the buckle release button pointing upwardand away from the child seat, with the tongue buttonbetween the child seat and the release button as shownin the following illustration.


Safety Restraints

57

[SR16400( X)02/96] Installing Safety Seats in Combination Lap andShoulder Belt Seating Positions

[SR16410( X)02/96] 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combinationlap and shoulder belt.

[SR16420( X)02/96] If you choose to install a child safety seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible.

[SR16430( X)02/96] 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulderbelt and lap belt together.

[SR16440( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011238-BPulling out belt webbing


58

[SR16450( X)02/96] While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together,route the tongue through the child seat according to thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the beltwebbing is not twisted.

[SR16460( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011239-BRouting the lap/shoulder belt


Safety Restraints

59

[SR16470( X)02/96] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for that seatingposition until you hear and feel the latch engage. Make surethe tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.

[SR16480( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011240-BBuckling the belt


60

[SR16490( X)02/96] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downwarduntil all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard to putthe retractor in the automatic locking mode.

[SR16500( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011241-ASetting the retractor to automatic locking mode


Safety Restraints

61

[SR16510( X)02/96] 6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts toindicate it is in the automatic locking mode.

[SR16520( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011242-AAllowing shoulder belt to retract


62

[SR16530( X)02/96] 7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward thebuckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing downon the child seat.

[SR16540( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011243-ARemoving slack from the belt

[SR16550( X)02/96] 8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in thebelt.

[SR16560( X)02/96] 9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seatforward and back to make sure the seat is securely held inplace.


Safety Restraints

63

[SR16570( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0011244-AChecking that the seat is secure

[SR16580( X)02/96] 10. Try to pull belt out of the retractor to make sure theretractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should notbe able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked,unbuckle the belt and repeat steps 2 through 9.

[SR16590( X)02/96] To remove the retractor from automatic locking mode, allowwebbing to retract fully to its stowed position and theretractor will automatically switch back to the vehiclesensitive locking mode for normal adult usage.


64

%*[SR18400(ALL)06/95] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps

*[SR18410(ALL)06/95] General Instructions

*[SR18413(ALL)06/95] Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tetherstrap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches toan anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strapas an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safetyseat for information about ordering a tether strap.

*[SR18417( X)06/95] You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket to the rear floor byusing a tether anchor kit (613D74), available at no charge fromany Ford dealership.

[SR18420(ALL)09/95] Read and follow the instructions provided with the kit carefully,for installation of the child tether strap anchor.

[SR18501(ALL)09/95] Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to attach thetether strap to the tether bracket.

*[SR18700( X)06/95] Ford recommends placement of tethered safety seats in a rearseating position with the tether strap installed to the tetheranchoring point as shown in the instructions provided with thechild tether strap anchor kit.


Only use the tether attachment hole locations shown inthe illustrations. The tether anchor may not performproperly if the wrong mounting location is used.

*[SR19400( X)06/95] The rear lap/shoulder safety belts should not be used to securethe tether strap of a safety seat located in the front seat.


Safety Restraints

65

%*[SR19700(ALL)07/95] Safety Belts for Children

*[SR19800(ALL)07/95] Children who are too large for child safety seats should alwayswear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, orcontact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of childthat will safely fit in the seat.)


If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted asdescribed, the risk of serious injury to the child in acollision will be much greater.

*[SR20000(ALL)12/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder beltscan be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of thechild’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle mayhelp provide a good shoulder belt fit.

*[SR20050(ALL)07/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children whohave outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of abelt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to allFederal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning boosterseats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seatingcushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit oflap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning boostershould be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’sface or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both


66

thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all theway back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang overthe edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss thespecific needs of your child with your pediatrician.

*[SR20200(ALL)07/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder beltsshould always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching thechild’s thighs.




67

Starting Your Explorer

*[ST01700(ALL)03/95] Ignition%*[ST01800(ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

[ST02000(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021143-A

The positions of the key in the ignition lock cylinder.

%*[ST02201(ALL)07/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessoriessuch as the radio and the windshield wipers to operate whilethe engine is not running.

*[ST02301(ALL)01/95] In order to turn the key from the ON or OFF position to theACCESSORY position, you must push the key release button ifyour vehicle’s manual transmission gearshift is mounted on thefloor.

*[ST02401(ALL)08/95] LOCK locks the steering wheel and gearshift lever.

*[ST02501(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Turn the key to LOCK whenever you leave your vehicle.Always set the parking brake fully and make sure thatthe gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatictransmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). Neverleave your vehicle unattended while it is running.

*[ST02651(ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key.The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft.

*[ST02701(ALL)05/95] If your key is stuck in the LOCK position and will not turn,move your steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely.

File:04unstx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996

68

*[ST02801(ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all accessorieswithout locking the steering wheel or the automatictransmission gearshift lever.

*[ST02901(ALL)05/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except thebrake system warning light) to make sure they work before youstart the engine. The key returns to the ON position once theengine is started and remains in this position while the engineruns.

*[ST02951(ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine startsso that you do not damage the starter. The key should return toON when you release it. The START position also allows you totest the brake warning light.

%*[ST03025(ALL)08/95] Ignition Key Buzzer or Chime

*[ST03050(ALL)08/95] The buzzer or chime will sound if you open the driver’s doorwhile the key is in the ignition. Never leave your vehicleunattended with the key in the ignition.

%*[ST03076(ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

*[ST03100(ALL)08/95] Procedures for removing your key from the ignition will vary,depending on the type of gearshift your vehicle has. Gearshiftlevers may be mounted on the steering column or on the flooror console.

[ST03117(ALL)05/91] If you have a manual transmission, you have a key release leverwhich allows you to remove your key from the ignition. Thekey release lever is on the upper right of the steering column,just above the key lock cylinder.

*[ST03300(ALL)08/95] If your vehicle’s gearshift lever is mounted on thecolumn:

*[ST03400(ALL)06/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).

*[ST03500(ALL)03/91] 2. Set the parking brake fully before removing your foot fromthe service brake. (This will avoid “binding” or “loading” thepark gear if you park on a grade.)



69

*[ST03600(ALL)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

*[ST03700(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key.

*[ST03800(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle’s gearshift lever is mounted on thefloor:

*[ST03950(ALL)05/95] 1. Put the gearshift in 1 (First).

*[ST04000(ALL)05/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

*[ST04100(ALL)05/95] 3. Set the parking brake fully before removing your foot fromthe service brake.

*[ST04200(ALL)05/95] 4. Push and hold in the key release button.

*[ST04300(ALL)05/95] 5. Turn the key to LOCK.

*[ST04400(ALL)05/95] 6. Remove the key.


Always set the parking brake fully and make sure thatthe gearshift is latched in P (Park) (automatictransmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).


Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone inyour vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselvesor others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle.Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries to people as well asanimals.


70

%*[ST04800(ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines

*[ST04900(ALL)03/95] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thingto remember is to avoid pressing down on the acceleratorbefore or during starting. Only use the accelerator when youhave problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting YourEngine in this chapter for details about when to use theaccelerator while you start your vehicle.

*[ST04950(ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle%*[ST05200(ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle


Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or otherenclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for morethan a short period of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against ExhaustFumes in this chapter for more instructions.

*[ST05400(ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[ST05500(ALL)08/95] 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehicle buckle their safetybelts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details.

*[ST05600(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turnedoff when starting.

*[ST05700(ALL)10/94] 3. If you have an automatic transmission, make sure that thegearshift lever is in P (Park) and the parking brake is setbefore you turn the key.

*[ST05800(ALL)03/91] 4. If you have a manual transmission, make sure that theparking brake is fully set, push the clutch pedal to the floor,and put the gearshift into Neutral before you turn the key.(Remember, the starter will operate only if the clutch pedalis pushed in all the way).



71

*[ST06000(ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lightson the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer tothe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.

%*[ST06200(ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine

*[ST06300(ALL)06/95] To start your engine:

*[ST06400(ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at thebeginning of this section.

*[ST06425(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

*[ST06451(ALL)06/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting yourengine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle isparked.

*[ST06475(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until theengine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON positionafter the engine has started.

*[ST06501(ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steeringwheel slightly because it may be binding.

%*[ST06510(ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:

*[ST06515(ALL)06/95] ■ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine doesnot start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the keyto OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

*[ST06520(ALL)04/95] ■ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the engine does notstart in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood theengine, then try again.


72

%*[ST06521(ALL)05/95] For a warm engine:

*[ST06522(ALL)04/95] ■ Do not hold the key in the START position for more thanfive (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start withinfive (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFFposition. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then tryagain.

*[ST06575(ALL)08/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as theengine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.

*[ST06601(ALL)09/95] After starting, allow the engine to idle for a few seconds beforedriving away.

%*[ST06775(ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts:

*[ST06825(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST06851(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it.

*[ST06876(ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

*[ST06900(ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts.

*[ST06925(ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up.Then drive away in the normal manner.

*[ST06951(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switchmay have been triggered. For directions on how to reset theswitch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

%*[ST07300(ALL)10/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When youstart your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs high.These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle coast slightlyfaster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow downafter a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked.

*[ST07390(ALL)07/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, donot allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Havethe vehicle checked.



73


Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce veryhigh temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,creating the risk of fire or other damage.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass orother dry ground cover. The emission system heats upthe engine compartment and exhaust system, which canstart a fire.

*[ST07500(ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures,use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option).

%*[ST07600(ALL)06/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)

*[ST07700(ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in aregion where temperatures reach s20˚F (s29˚C) or belowconsistently during the winter months. An engine block heaterwarms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms upthe engine faster, and allows the heater-defrost system torespond quickly.


To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)adapters.

*[ST08100(ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours beforeyou start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than threehours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at nightto start your vehicle the following morning.

*[ST08150(ALL)12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine block heater beforedriving your vehicle.


74

%*[ST08175(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start orDoes Not Start After a Collision

*[ST08200(ALL)07/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[ST08210(ALL)10/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after acollision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have beentriggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop thefuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a major jolt.

*[ST08215(ALL)03/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switchby hand before you can start your vehicle.

[ST08225(ALL)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090157-AFuel pump shut-off switch location


If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try tostart your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of thevehicle and call the local fire department or a towingservice.



75

*[ST08275(ALL)10/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision ormajor jolt:

*[ST08290(ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the key in the ignition to OFF.

*[ST08300(ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST08325(ALL)03/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset buttondown. If the button is already set, you may have a differentmechanical problem.

*[ST08350(ALL)01/95] 4. Turn the ignition key ON for a few seconds, then turn itOFF.

*[ST08375(ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see orsmell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do notsee or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again.

*[ST08400(ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving your vehicle.

[ST08450(ALL)01/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0021144-A

Reset button for fuel pump shut-off switch


76

%*[ST09300(ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[ST09400(ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present inexhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.


Never let your vehicle idle in an enclosed area, and donot sit in a parked vehicle, (with the engine running) formore than a short period of time. Exhaust fumes,particularly carbon monoxide, might build up. Thesefumes are harmful and could kill you.


If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do notdrive if you smell exhaust fumes.

*[ST09900(ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checkedwhenever:

*[ST10000(ALL)02/95] ■ your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST10100(ALL)02/95] ■ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST10200(ALL)01/95] ■ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision



77

*[ST10300(ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear ofsnow, leaves, and other debris.

*[ST10400(ALL)08/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open areafor long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch(2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning system tobring in outside air.

[ST10650(ALL)03/95] ■ HEATING — Set fan speed to medium or high, the functioncontrol knob on any position except OFF and thetemperature control knob on any desired position.

[ST10700(ALL)03/95] ■ AIR CONDITIONING — Set fan speed to medium or highwith the function control knob on any position (except OFFor MAX A/C) and the temperature control knob at acomfortable level.


79

Warning Lights and Gauges

%*[LG00400(ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is dividedinto several different sections. The illustrations on the followingpages show the major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on allvehicles.

[LG00550( X)11/89] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are groupedtogether on the instrument panel. We call this grouping acluster. Your vehicle has a mechanical cluster with tachometer.

File:05unlgx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996

80

[LG02600(A

LL)12/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

90

10

7-C

Mechanical

clusterw

ithtachom

eter

File:05unlgx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996


81

%*[LG03000(ALL)06/94] The Mechanical Cluster

*[LG03100(ALL)06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are on the mechanicalcluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you topossible problems with your vehicle. Some of the lights listedare optional. The following sections detail what each of theseindicators means.

%*[LG03200(ALL)06/95] Brake System Warning Light

*[LG03300(ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show two things — thatthe parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluidlevel is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked by your dealer or aqualified service technician.

*[LG03400(ALL)05/94] This light comes on when you turn the ignition key to STARTto verify that the indicator bulb is working. If the light stays onor comes on after you have released the parking brake fully,have the hydraulic brake system serviced.

*[LG03500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not beworking properly. Have the brakes checked immediately.

[LG03600(ALL)04/94]

6 pica art:0021145-A

Brake warning light symbols


82

*[LG03800(ALL)02/95] Anti-lock Brake Warning Light

[LG03925(ALL)03/95] To check the ABS brake warning light, turn the ignition key toON. The ABS brake warning light should glow momentarily.

[LG04050(ALL)06/94]


Anti-lock warning light symbol


If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on orcomes on while driving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soon as possible.

*[LG04110(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brakewarning light is not lit, the anti-lock system isdisabled but normal brake function remainsoperational.

%*[LG04150(ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG04301(ALL)08/95] The safety belt warning light/chime reminds you to fasten yoursafety belt. One of the following will take place:

[LG04325(ALL)03/95] ■ If the safety belt is not buckled when the key is turned tothe ON position, the light comes on for 60 seconds and thechime sounds for 4 to 8 seconds.

*[LG04351(ALL)02/95] ■ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is on and thechime is sounding, both the light and chime turn off.

[LG04355(ALL)03/95] ■ If safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ONposition, both the light and the chime will not turn on.



83

[LG04400(ALL)08/94]

6 pica art:0021148-B

Safety belt warning light symbol

%*[LG04420(ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

[LG04430(ALL)06/95] This light illuminates for approximately six seconds when theignition key is turned to the ON position to verify that theindicator bulb is working and the air bag system is operatingnormally.

[LG04435(ALL)04/95] RWARNING

A problem with the air bag system is indicated by one ormore of the following: the readiness light will eitherflash or stay lit, or it will not light, or a group of fivebeeps will be heard.


If any of these things happen, even intermittently, havethe air bag system serviced at your Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer immediately.

[LG04440(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021268-A

Air bag readiness light symbol


84

[LG04450(ALL)10/94] Door Ajar Warning Light (If equipped)

*[LG04460(ALL)08/94] If the ignition switch is in the ON position and any door or theliftgate is not completely closed, the light will illuminate.

[LG04480(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021269-A

Door ajar warning light symbol

%*[LG04500(ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

*[LG04600(ALL)05/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consistsof the hardware and software necessary to monitor theoperation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control systemduring normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, theCheck Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

*[LG04650(ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrectoperation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglaralarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tapping into or runningwires close to powertrain control system wires or components.

[LG04675(ALL)02/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key tothe ON position, but it should turn off when the engine cranks.If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to theON position or if it comes on and stays on when you aredriving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as convenientlypossible. This indicates a possible problem with one of theengine’s emission control systems. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed in.



85

*[LG04680(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals whileyou are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine ismisfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at thefirst opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towedin.

*[LG04685(ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you aredriving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the conditioncorrected itself.

*[LG04695(ALL)05/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Lightwill turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is notnecessary to have the engine serviced.

[LG04720(ALL)03/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light maycome on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the lightcomes on and you suspect the fuel cap is not properly installed,pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off theengine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, making sure it isproperly seated.

[LG04750(ALL)03/95] After completing the three consecutive warm-up cycles and onthe fourth engine start-up, the Check Engine Warning Lightshould turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourthengine restart, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or aqualified technician.

[LG05300(ALL)04/94]


Check engine warning light symbol


86

%*[LG05835(ALL)10/94] Overdrive Off Indicator (If equipped)

[LG05850(ALL)05/95] This light tells you that the Transmission Control Switch (TCS)on the gearshift lever has been pushed. When the light is on,the transmission does not shift into overdrive. Depressing thebutton on the shifter once more returns the vehicle to overdrivemode. The transmission will be in the overdrive mode when thevehicle is started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected whenthe vehicle was last shut off.

*[LG05855(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when the TCS isdepressed or if the light flashes when you are driving,have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. Ifthis condition persists, damage could occur to thetransmission.

[LG05865(ALL)10/94]


Overdrive off light (if equipped)

[LG05870( X)03/95] Speed Control Light (If equipped)

*[LG05875( X)07/95] This light comes on when you turn on the speed control systemand set the speed. The light will be on whenever the speedcontrol is set, even if you override the set speed by pressing theaccelerator pedal or by pressing the coast button. The light willgo off when the brakes are used or the speed control system isturned off.

[LG05885( X)07/95] This light does not indicate any problems with the speed controlsystem, but is only a convenience to tell you when the speedcontrol system is active and ready to maintain a set speed.



87

[LG05890( X)03/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090108-A

Speed control light

%*[LG05900(ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

*[LG06000(ALL)03/95] This light, shown as a battery symbol on your cluster, indicatesthat your battery is not being charged and that you need tohave the electrical system checked.

[LG06050(ALL)10/94]


Charging system light symbol

*[LG06100(ALL)07/95] This light comes on every time you turn the ignition to the ONor START position (engine off). The light should go off whenthe engine starts and the alternator begins to charge.

*[LG06300(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running,have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.


88

%*[LG06310( X)04/95] Anti-Theft Alarm Light (If equipped)

[LG06335(ALL)04/95] This light flashes on and off when the ignition switch is OFFand any door is opened. As soon as you lock the doors, thelight glows steadily. Within 30 seconds of closing all the doors,the light flashes intermittently (every 2 seconds). This indicatesthat the alarm system is armed.

[LG06345( X)10/94]


Anti-theft alarm light

[LG06350(ALL)10/94] Check Gage Light (If equipped)

*[LG06355(ALL)06/94] This light will come on when the key is in the ON position andthe:

[LG06360(ALL)06/94] ■ engine coolant temperature is high[LG06365(ALL)06/94] ■ engine oil pressure is low[LG06370(ALL)06/94] ■ fuel level is near empty

[LG06375(ALL)06/94] This light serves as a notice that a system needs your attentionand to check the engine coolant temperature gauge, the engineoil pressure gauge, and the fuel level gauge.

[LG06380(ALL)03/95] Please see Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge, Engine Oil PressureGauge, or Fuel Gauge in this chapter for more information.

[LG06385(ALL)10/94]


Check gage light



89

[LG06390(ALL)03/95] Fuel Reset Light (If Equipped)

[LG06393(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle may have a fuel reset light. The fuel reset lightwill come on when you turn the ignition key to ON and thefuel pump shut-off switch has been triggered. Refer to Fuelpump shut-off switch in the Index to find additional information.

[LG06395(ALL)10/94]


Fuel reset light

%*[LG06400(ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (Voltmeter)

*[LG06601(ALL)05/94] This gauge shows you the battery voltage when the ignition keyis in the ON position.

*[LG06701(ALL)05/95] If the battery is operating under cold weather conditions, thepointer may indicate in the upper range of the NORMAL bandwhile the battery is charging. If you are running electricalaccessories with the engine off or idling at a low speed, or thebattery is not fully charged, the pointer may move toward thelower end of the NORMAL band.

*[LG06750(ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your vehicle’selectrical system checked as soon as it is safely possible.

[LG06850(ALL)07/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0020539-H

Battery voltage gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer


90

%*[LG07500(ALL)05/94] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

*[LG07601(ALL)06/93] This gauge indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level.However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oilpressure. With the engine running, the pointer should move intothe NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below the NORMALband while the engine is running, you have lost oil pressureand continued operation will cause severe engine damage.

*[LG07701(ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG07801(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG07901(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon assafely possible, severe engine damage could result.

*[LG08001(ALL)02/95] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the instructions onchecking and adding engine oil. Refer to Engine oil in theIndex. If you do not follow these instructions, you or otherscould be injured. To assure an accurate reading, your vehicleshould be on level ground.

*[LG08051(ALL)03/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary beforeyou start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operatethe engine if the pointer is below the NORMAL band,regardless of the oil level. Contact your nearest dealer forfurther service actions.

[LG08150(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020540-E

Engine oil pressure gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer



91

%*[LG08900(ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG09001(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps are turned on highbeam or when you flash the lights.

[LG09025(ALL)10/94]


High beam indicator light symbol

%*[LG09300(ALL)03/95] “Headlamps On” Alert Chime

[LG09400(ALL)09/95] This chime sounds if you open the driver’s door while theheadlamps or parking lamps are on, and the key is removedfrom the ignition.

%*[LG09500(ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

*[LG09700(ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel is in thefuel tank only when the ignition switch is ON.

*[LG09850(ALL)01/95] For a proper fuel gauge indication after adding fuel, the ignitionswitch should be in the OFF position while the vehicle is beingrefueled.

*[LG09860(ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when the vehicle isin motion.

*[LG09875(ALL)08/93] With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gauge indicator may driftfrom the ignition switch ON position.


92

[LG10300(ALL)10/94]

6 pica art:0020752-E

Fuel gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer

%*[LG11100(ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG11201(ALL)03/95] This gauge tells you the temperature of the engine coolant, notthe coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level ormixture, the gauge indicator will not be accurate.

*[LG11301(ALL)08/95] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into the Normalband as the engine coolant warms up. It is acceptable for thepointer to fluctuate within the Normal band under normaldriving conditions. Under certain driving conditions, such asheavy stop and go traffic or driving up hills in hot weather, thepointer may move to the top of the Normal band.

*[LG11401(ALL)05/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above theNORMAL band, the engine coolant is overheating andcontinued operation may cause engine damage.

*[LG11501(ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG11601(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible.

*[LG11701(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon assafely possible, severe engine damage could result.

*[LG11801(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANTSYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL.

*[LG11901(ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions onchecking and adding coolant to your engine. Refer to Enginecoolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions,you or others could be injured.



93

*[LG12240(ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the coolant systemserviced as soon as possible.

[LG12325(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021154-C

Engine coolant temperature gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer

%*[LG12601(ALL)01/95] Speedometer

*[LG12700(ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) perhour your vehicle is moving.

*[LG12753(ALL)08/95] Some vehicles are equipped with a vehicle speed (mph/km/h)limiting device that is contained within the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM). The purpose of this device is to maintain peakvehicle speed below a specified limit. (Vehicle speed limits mayvary based on engine displacement.)

*[LG12756(ALL)05/95] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at highspeeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is anormal condition and can be avoided by reducingvehicle/engine speed.


94

[LG12790(ALL)08/94]

10-1/2 pica art:0020873-F

Speedometer

%*[LG12801(ALL)01/95] Odometer

*[LG12900(ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles (kilometers)your vehicle has been driven.

%*[LG13000(ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer

*[LG13100(ALL)03/93] If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9 miles(kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simply set the trip odometerto zero by pressing the reset button firmly when beginning thedistance you wish to measure.

%*[LG13250( X)02/95] Tachometer

*[LG13300(ALL)05/95] The tachometer will show you the engine’s speed measured inrevolutions per minute (RPM).

*[LG13400(ALL)05/95] The tachometer may move slightly when the key is placed inthe ACC or ON position, with the engine off. This is normaland does not affect the performance of the tachometer when theengine is running.



95

*[LG13525(ALL)09/95] Some vehicles are equipped with an engine speed (RPM)limiting device contained within the Powertrain Control Module(PCM). The purpose of this device is to maintain peak enginespeed (RPM) below a specified limit. This feature is onlyevident on automatic transmission vehicles when shiftingmanually (1, 2, D) and on all manual transmission units. (Enginespeed limits may vary based on engine displacement.)

*[LG13550(ALL)05/95] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at highspeeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is anormal condition and can be avoided by reducingvehicle/engine speed.

[LG13650(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica art:0020528-E

Tachometer

[LG13675(ALL)03/93] NOTE: If the 4.0L engine exceeds 5200 RPM, the PCM willrestrict fuel flow to maintain engine speed at or below5200 RPM. This function is designed to protect theengine and should be considered normal operation.


96

%*[LG35000( X)04/95] The Electronic Message Center(If equipped)

[LG35050( X)03/95] The Electronic Message Center (M/C) display, located in thecenter of the floor console, works only when your ignition is inthe ON position. Each time the M/C is powered, the displaygoes through a self-test by displaying a blank message for twoseconds. This self-test is used to stabilize the systems beforereporting the status of the systems to you.

*[LG35100( X)01/95] The M/C tells you about the condition of your vehicle by twomethods:

*[LG35150( X)01/95] ■ Operator selectable features

*[LG35200( X)01/95] ■ Continuous warning reporting of monitored systems

*[LG35250( X)01/95] You can select different features for the M/C to display byusing the keyboard directly below the M/C display. You willhear a tone when you press one of these switches. However, ifthe M/C detects a warning from any of the monitored systemsthen the M/C will display the appropriate warning message.

%*[LG35300( X)01/95] Operator Selectable Features

*[LG35350( X)01/95] These features are controlled by the switches in the keyboardbelow the M/C display. The following pages describe theoperation of the individual switches.



97

[LG35400( X)08/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021115-BElectronic message center

*[LG35450( X)01/95] English/Metric

*[LG35500( X)01/95] A press of the ENGLISH/METRIC switch allows you to changethe M/C and electronic climate control displays from English tometric units. When you press this switch, all the displayschange from English to metric or metric to English units. Thedisplays remain in the units you have chosen until you changethem again, even after you turn off the vehicle and start itagain.

*[LG35550( X)01/95] Fuel Range

[LG35600( X)10/94] A press of the FUEL RANGE switch allows you to display oneof two features (Distance to Empty or Distance Driven). Thefirst press of the FUEL RANGE switch allows you to displayapproximately how many miles or kilometers you can drivebefore you run out of fuel.


98

*[LG35650( X)01/95] To ensure accuracy, turn the ignition OFF when you fill the fueltank.

[LG35700( X)06/94] NOTE: Distance to empty is calculated using a “RunningAverage Fuel Economy” initialized by the factory. Thevalue is not the same as the Average Fuel EconomyDisplay. The Running Average Fuel Economy is basedon more than 500 miles (800 km) of driving history.Also, the factory default for Running Average FuelEconomy is reinitialized if the battery is disconnected.

*[LG35750( X)05/95] If the “FUEL LEVEL ERROR” message is displayed, this meansthat there is a problem with the fuel indication system and youshould contact your dealer for service as soon as possible.

[LG35800( X)03/95] A second consecutive press of the FUEL RANGE switch allowsyou to display how many miles or kilometers you have drivensince you last reset this feature. A press of the RESET switchwith MILE (KM) DRIVEN displayed resets the distance drivento 0.0 miles or kilometers.

*[LG35850( X)05/95] Fuel Status

*[LG35900( X)01/95] A press of the FUEL STATUS switch allows you to display oneof two features (Fuel Remaining or Fuel Used). The first pressof the FUEL STATUS switch allows you to display theapproximate amount of fuel in the tank in whole numbers(gallons or liters).

*[LG35950( X)01/95] If your fuel tank is full or nearly full, the M/C will display the“FULL FUEL TANK” message. If your fuel tank is empty ornearly empty, the M/C will display the “EMPTY FUEL TANK”message.

[LG36000( X)04/94] A second consecutive press of the FUEL STATUS switch allowsyou to display the amount of fuel used since you last reset thisfeature. A press of the RESET switch with GALLONS (LITERS)USED displayed resets the amount to 0.0 gallons or liters used.



99

*[LG36050( X)01/95] Because of factors like rounding of numbers and fuel movementin the tank, the M/C and the service station fuel pump readingsmay disagree slightly.

%*[LG36100( X)05/95] Fuel Economy

[LG36150( X)10/94] A press of the FUEL ECON switch allows you to display one oftwo features (Average Fuel Economy or Instantaneous FuelEconomy). The first press of the FUEL ECON switch will allowyou to display your average fuel economy in miles/gallons orliters/kilometers. Your M/C computes this figure using thedistance traveled and fuel used information. If you want to resetthis feature, press the RESET switch while the average fueleconomy feature is displayed. Your average fuel economy willthen use data only from after the RESET was pressed tocalculate the new average.

[LG36200( X)10/94] A second consecutive press of the FUEL ECON switch willallow you to display the instantaneous fuel economy, which isthe fuel economy that you get at any particular moment. Forexample, you can see what your fuel economy is in heavy trafficor on an open highway. Your fuel economy is affected by suchfactors as braking, acceleration, and the type of road you aredriving on.

*[LG36250( X)01/95] Your vehicle must be moving for the M/C to calculate the fueleconomy. When your vehicle is not moving, instantaneous fueleconomy will be displayed at 0 miles/gallon or99 kilometers/100 liters. When you are moving, the M/C willdisplay between 0 and 99 miles/gallon or between 1 and99 kilometers/100 liters.

*[LG36300( X)01/95] Reset

[LG36350( X)01/95] A press of the RESET switch will allow you to reset the currentfeature being displayed. Warnings, Distance Driven, AverageFuel Economy, Fuel Used, and your Personalized Oil ResetPercentage are the only features which respond to the RESETswitch. Distance to Empty, Fuel Remaining, and Instantaneous


100

Fuel Economy cannot be reset. That is, these three features areunaffected by pushing the RESET switch.

%*[LG36750( X)01/95] System Check

*[LG36800( X)01/95] A press of the SYSTEM CHECK switch causes the M/C to cyclethrough a status of each of the systems being monitored. Foreach of the monitored systems, the M/C will indicate either anOK message or a warning message for two seconds. Thesequence of the system check report is as follows:

*[LG36850( X)01/95] ■ Engine Oil Life Left

*[LG36900( X)01/95] ■ Engine Oil Level

*[LG37000( X)01/95] ■ Voltage Level

*[LG37050( X)01/95] ■ Engine Coolant Temperature

*[LG37100( X)01/95] ■ Washer Fluid Level

[LG37150( X)04/94] ■ Head Lamps

[LG37200( X)04/94] ■ Tail Lamps

[LG37250( X)04/94] ■ Brake Lamps

[LG37300( X)06/94] ■ Air Ride System (if equipped)

*[LG37350( X)01/95] ■ Fuel Level

*[LG37400( X)01/95] At normal conclusion of the system check sequence, the M/Cwill display the last displayed feature before pressing theSYSTEM CHECK switch or the warnings that are active.

*[LG37450( X)01/95] For two of the systems reported in the system check (Engine OilLife Left and Fuel Level), there are two messages to describe thestatus of the system. For Engine Oil Life Left, the first messagewill indicate the oil change status (OK, SOON, REQUIRED) andthe second message will indicate the oil life remaining as apercentage. If the second message is “OIL TEMP SIGNALERROR”, this means that there is a problem with the oiltemperature sender system and you should contact your dealer



101

for service as soon as possible. For Fuel Level, the first messagewill indicate the fuel level status (OK or LOW) and the secondmessage will indicate the range (distance to empty).

*[LG37500( X)01/95] Message center operation during system check

*[LG37550( X)01/95] The M/C switches will operate as follows during the SystemCheck sequence:

*[LG37600( X)01/95] 1. A press of the SYSTEM CHECK switch will advance thecycle to the next system message without waiting the twoseconds.

*[LG37650( X)01/95] 2. A press of the RESET switch anytime during this sequencewill cause the SYSTEM CHECK cycle to concludeimmediately and the last displayed feature before pressingSYSTEM CHECK will be displayed.

[LG37700( X)04/94] 3. A press of the RANGE, FUEL STATUS, OR FUELECONOMY, switch will conclude the SYSTEM CHECK cycleand the requested feature will be displayed.

*[LG37750( X)01/95] 4. A press of the ENGLISH/METRIC switch will halt theSYSTEM CHECK cycle and display, in the new mode, thelast displayed feature before pressing the SYSTEM CHECKswitch.

*[LG37800( X)01/95] 5. A press of the OIL CHANGE RESET switch during thesequence will cause the SYSTEM CHECK cycle to concludeand the Oil Change Reset Procedure will begin.

*[LG37850( X)01/95] System Warnings

[LG37900( X)01/95] System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctionsin your vehicle’s operating systems. There are twelve warningmessages which can be displayed by the Message Center (M/C)to show the status of the monitored systems. When a warningoccurs, the warning message is displayed and a tone sounds.The warning message will appear at a brighter level if theinstrument panel is dimmed.


102

*[LG37950( X)01/95] In the event of a multiple warning situation, the M/C will cyclethe display to show all warnings by displaying each warningmessage for 4 seconds.

*[LG38000( X)01/95] Using the message center while a warning is active

[LG38050( X)04/94] If you want to display the operator selectable features of theM/C while a warning is displayed, the warning message maybe removed from the M/C display by pressing the RESETswitch. The M/C will display the last selected feature if thereare no more warning messages. This allows you to use the fullfunctionality of the M/C after you acknowledge the warning bypressing the RESET switch and clearing the warning message.

*[LG38100( X)01/95] Warning messages which have been reset are divided into twocategories. They will reappear on the display in 10 minutesfrom the reset or they will not reappear until an ignition keyOFF-ON cycle. This reappearing of warning messages is areminder that these warning conditions still exist within thevehicle. Warnings may be repeatedly reset. All warningmessages will reappear after an entire SYSTEM CHECKsequence has been completed.



103

*[LG38150( X)01/95] The following is a list of warning messages and their associatedreset category:

[LG38200( X)04/94]

fourteen pica

chart:0021147-A

*[LG38250( X)01/95] Check Engine Temp

*[LG38300( X)01/95] This warning message is displayed when the engine coolant isoverheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn offengine and let it cool. Check the coolant and level following theinstructions in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter. If you do notfollow these instructions, you or others could be injured.

*[LG38350( X)01/95] Check Charging System

*[LG38400( X)03/95] This warning message is displayed when the electrical system isnot maintaining a proper voltage. If you are running electricalaccessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off asmany of the electrical loads as soon as safely possible. If thiswarning stays on or comes on when the engine is operating atnormal speeds, have the electrical system checked as soon as itis safely possible.


104

*[LG38450( X)01/95] Low Fuel Level

*[LG38500( X)01/95] This warning message is displayed when you haveapproximately 50 miles (80 km) left before you run out of fuel.

*[LG38550( X)01/95] Low Oil Level

*[LG38600( X)01/95] This warning message is displayed when your engine oil level islow. If this warning message is displayed, check the level of theengine oil.

*[LG38650( X)02/95] To check your oil:

*[LG38700( X)05/95] 1. Park your vehicle on level ground, turn off the engine andwait at least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oilpan.

*[LG38750( X)01/95] 2. Use the dipstick to check the oil. If the level is low, add oil,but do not overfill.

*[LG38800( X)01/95] If you are parked on a steep incline, the LOW OIL LEVELwarning may come on when you start your vehicle, eventhough the oil is at the correct level.

*[LG38850( X)01/95] For information about adding oil, see Engine oil in the Index.

%*[LG38900( X)05/95] Low Washer Fluid Light

*[LG38950( X)04/95] This warning message is displayed when the washer fluidreservoir is less than one quarter full.

[LG39000( X)01/95] Check Head Lamps

[LG39050( X)08/94] This warning message is displayed when you turn on yourheadlamps and at least one of them is burned out. A high beamheadlamp burn out is not monitored.

[LG39100( X)04/94] Check Tail Lamps

[LG39150( X)04/94] This warning message is displayed when you turn on your rearparking (tail) lamps and at least one of them is burned out.



105

[LG39200( X)04/94] Check Brake Lamps

[LG39250( X)03/95] This warning message is displayed when you turn on yourbrakelamps by pressing the brake pedal and at least one of thelamps is burned out.

[LG39300( X)04/94] If you use additional lights, such as trailer lights, or if youreplace the headlamps or bulbs with equipment that is not equalto the original equipment from Ford, you may get a false“CHECK LAMPS” warning or no warning at all.

[LG39350( X)06/94] Air Ride Switch Off (If equipped)

[LG39400( X)03/95] This warning message is displayed when the air suspensionswitch, located in the rear jack stowage area on the left side, isoff. For information about the operation of the air suspensionswitch, see Automatic ride control system in the Index.

[LG39450( X)06/94] Check Air Ride System (If equipped)

[LG39500( X)03/95] This warning message is displayed when an air suspensionsystem fault has been detected. If this warning message isdisplayed while driving, safely pull off the road at your earliestconvenience. If the vehicle is loaded beyond the recommendedmaximum payload, the CHECK AIR RIDE SYSTEM messagemay be displayed. This is a normal condition if the vehicle isoverloaded. To correct this condition, remove or redistribute thepayload per the recommended maximum requirements. Turn theignition switch from ON to OFF and ON again. If the warningmessage reappears, turn the air suspension switch (located inthe rear jack stowage area on the left side) OFF and take yourvehicle to a dealership for service as soon as possible.

*[LG39550( X)01/95] Change Oil Soon or Oil Change Required

*[LG39600( X)01/95] One of these warning messages is displayed when the engine oillife remaining is 5% or less. When Oil Life Left is between 5%and 0%, the “CHANGE OIL SOON” message will be displayed.When Oil Life Left reaches 0%, the “OIL CHANGE REQUIRED”message will be displayed.


106

*[LG39650( X)01/95] An oil change is required whenever indicated by the M/C. USEONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS (See Engine oil in theIndex).

*[LG39700( X)01/95] The M/C will tell you the percent of oil life left during SystemCheck. This percentage is based on your driving history and thetime since your last oil change. In order to ensure accurate oillife left indications, you should only perform the following OILCHANGE RESET Procedure after you have the oil changed.

*[LG39801( X)01/95] Oil Change Reset

[LG39901( X)08/94] A press of the OIL CHANGE RESET switch will allow you toreset the oil life feature to 100% (or your Personalized Oil ResetPercentage). After you have the oil changed, you must executethe following procedure. Press the OIL CHANGE RESET switchand hold for five seconds as the M/C counts down for fiveseconds. After a successful reset the Message Center will display“OIL LIFE RESET TO 100%.” If you have established aPersonalized Oil Reset Percentage, the display will show thatpercentage instead of 100%. To ensure accurate oil lifeindicators, perform this reset procedure only after an oil change.

[LG40001( X)08/94] Your Personalized Oil Reset Percentage allows you to establish asmaller oil change interval than the manufacturer’srecommended interval. To establish your Personalized Oil ResetPercentage perform the following procedure:

[LG40101( X)08/94] 1. Press and hold the OIL CHANGE RESET switch and pressthe RESET switch while the display is still counting downthe 5 seconds to reset. The display will change to “STARTOIL LIFE AT XXX%.”

[LG40201( X)08/94] 2. Press the OIL CHANGE RESET switch until the displayedpercentage is the Personalized Oil Reset Percentage that youdesire. Your choices are 100%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%,40% and 30%.



107

[LG40301( X)08/94] 3. Press the RESET switch to complete the procedure. A pressof any switch besides RESET or OIL CHANGE RESET willabort this procedure and will not establish your newPersonalized Oil Reset Percentage.

[LG40401( X)08/94] When your Personalized Oil Reset Percentage has beenestablished, it will be used beginning with the completion ofyour next OIL CHANGE RESET procedure.


109

Instrument

Panel

Controls

[IP0

02

50

(X

)12

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

90

19

8-B

Instrument

Panel

&C

ontrols

File:06unipx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996

110

[IP00400( X)03/95] The main controls for the climate control system, lights, messagecenter, lamps, clocks and radio are on the instrument panel.

%*[IP00475(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the gloss (shine)of the upper part of the instrument panel should beavoided. The dull finish in this area is to help protectthe driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

%*[IP00500(ALL)06/95] The Climate Control Systems

*[IP00601(ALL)12/91] Your vehicle is equipped with a control assembly designed tohandle either a combination A/C-Heater System or aHeater-Only System.

%*[IP00801(ALL)10/93] Instrument Panel Registers

*[IP00901(ALL)02/95] There are four registers in the instrument panel. Each of theseregisters contains a louver assembly which can be manuallyadjusted to direct airflow up, down, left and right. Anillustration of the register locations follows.

[IP01201(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020099-D

Instrument panel registers

[IP01400(ALL)12/91] Air Conditioning (A/C) Controls (Manual AirConditioning)

*[IP01450(ALL)02/95] The control for your air conditioning and heater system islocated at the center of the instrument panel below the radioand will operate only when the ignition key is turned to theON position. Your air conditioner and heater will heat and/orcool your vehicle interior depending on the function position

File:06unipx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996

Instrument Panel Controls

111

and temperature you select. The function selector control knoballows you to select heating or cooling and determine where theair will be directed. The temperature control knob settingdetermines the temperature of the air that flows into the vehicle.

[IP01500(ALL)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020589-GClimate control knobs

*[IP01550(ALL)03/95] To turn your air conditioner and heater system on, select anyposition except OFF. This will turn the fan on and allow airflowinto the vehicle. To turn your air conditioner and heater off,select OFF. This will turn the fan off and stop airflow fromcoming into the vehicle.

*[IP01600(ALL)03/95] Temperature selection

[IP01650(ALL)03/95] The temperature control knob is the rotating knob located at thecenter of the control with tapered red and blue bandssurrounding most of the knob. The wide red part of the band(full right) is the heat or warmer area. The wide blue area (fullleft) is the cooling or cool temperature area. Any positionselected between full right and full left will give a temperaturebetween the two extreme temperatures.


112

*[IP01700(ALL)03/95] H Fan speed adjustment

[IP01750(ALL)03/95] The H (left) knob on the control is the fan control knob whichcontrols the volume of air flow. Rotate the H knob to the rightto increase fan speed and increase the amount of air enteringthe vehicle. Four fan speed positions are available and areindicated by dots beside the H control knob. The largest dot ishigh speed position.

*[IP01800(ALL)08/94] Airflow selections

[IP01850(ALL)08/95] Q (Panel)

[IP01900(ALL)03/95] Use Q to bring outside air through the instrument panelregisters. You can heat the air in this position by rotating thetemperature knob into the red area. The air CANNOT be cooledbelow the outside temperature regardless of the temperatureknob setting. Select A/C or MAX A/C to get cool air throughthe instrument panel registers.

*[IP01950(ALL)08/95] A/C

[IP02000(ALL)06/94] Select A/C to get refrigerated outside air through theinstrument panel registers. The A/C position is used for coolingexcept when it is extremely hot or fast cooling of the vehicle isneeded. Then, select MAX A/C for fast cooling and return toA/C when you are comfortable.

*[IP02050(ALL)08/95] MAX A/C

[IP02100(ALL)05/95] The MAX A/C position produces cool air more rapidly toprovide faster cooling of your vehicle. This is possible becausecooler air is drawn from inside the passenger area andrefrigerated again instead of using warmer outside air. Usinginside air will also make the fan sound louder and is normalwhen using MAX A/C. The air flow will be from theinstrument panel registers.



113

[IP02150(ALL)08/95] S (Panel and Floor)

[IP02200(ALL)03/95] Select S to direct airflow to the floor and through theinstrument panel registers at the same time. This selection canbe used to either heat or cool your vehicle. The air conditionerwill operate to cool the air if the outside temperature is about50˚F (10˚C) or warmer.

*[IP02250(ALL)08/95] R (Floor)

[IP02300(ALL)03/95] Select R to direct air to the floor. The air cannot be cooled inthe R position but can be heated by rotating the temperatureknob into the red area.

[IP02350(ALL)08/95] P (Floor and Defrost)

[IP02400(ALL)03/95] Select P to direct air to the floor and windshield defrosters atthe same time. If the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C)or warmer, the air will also be dehumidified to removemoisture. This feature will help prevent fogging in humidweather. The air can be cooled or heated.

%*[IP02450(ALL)08/95] V (Defrost)

[IP02500(ALL)03/95] Select V to obtain maximum airflow to the windshield. Rotatethe temperature knob into the red area for the air temperaturerequired to defrost. When the outside temperature is about 50˚F(10˚C) or warmer, the air will be dehumidified to removemoisture. Rotate the H knob to increase the airflow.


114

*[IP02550(ALL)04/95] Operating tips

*[IP02600(ALL)02/95] The following tips will help you to get the most satisfactionfrom your air conditioning and heater system.

[IP02650(ALL)03/95] ■ In humid weather, select V before starting your engine.This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After a fewminutes of operation, you may select another function.

[IP02700(ALL)03/95] ■ To prevent humidity buildup inside your vehicle, alwaysdrive with the air conditioner or heater system turned on.

*[IP02750(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not put objects under the front seats that interfere withthe flow of air to the back seat area.

[IP02800(ALL)03/95] ■ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air intake area ofyour air conditioner and heater system that could block theair intake. The intake area is located at the bottom of thewindshield.

[IP04500( X)03/95] Electronic Automatic Temperature Control(If equipped)

[IP04600( X)03/95] The control for your Electronic Automatic Temperature Control(EATC) is located at the center of the instrument panel belowthe radio and will operate only when the ignition key is turnedon to the ON position.

[IP04700( X)03/95] The EATC feature will maintain the temperature you select andautomatically control the airflow for your comfort. It also allowsyou to override the automatic operation with manual overridebuttons.



115

[IP04800( X)03/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090132-AElectronic automatic temperature control system

*[IP04850( X)02/95] To turn your EATC on, push the AUTOMATIC button or anyof the six override buttons along the bottom of the control.

[IP04900( X)03/95] To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button. When the systemis off, the display window will be blank (dark) when theignition is on. The display will also be blank (dark) when theignition is off.

*[IP05000( X)01/95] If you select AUTOMATIC, the system will automaticallydetermine fan speed and airflow location. If an override buttonis selected, your selection determines airflow location only. Fanspeed remains automatic unless you override it by rotating thevertical thumbwheel located at the extreme right of the controlpanel.


116

[IP05100( X)03/95] To change the temperature in the display window, select anytemperature between 65˚F (18˚C) and 85˚F (29˚C) using theBLUE (cooler) or RED (warmer) buttons. The ElectronicAutomatic Temperature Control will do the rest.

[IP05150( X)03/95] To change the temperature display from ˚F to ˚C or from ˚C to˚F, press and hold the MAX A/C and the DEF V buttons atthe same time for one second.

[IP05200( X)03/95] If you want continuous maximum cooling, push the BLUEbutton until 60˚F (16˚C) is shown in the display window. YourEATC will cool at maximum and disregard the 60˚F (16˚C)setting until you select a warmer temperature with the REDbutton. If you want continuous maximum heating, push theRED button until 90˚F (32˚C) is shown in the display window.Your EATC will provide maximum heat regardless of the 90˚F(32˚C) setting until you select a cooler temperature with theBLUE button.

*[IP05300( X)03/95] The display window tells you how the system is operating. Itwill indicate the selected temperature and the operating functionyou have chosen; AUTO or one of the six manual overrides. Itwill also indicate manual (thumbwheel) control of the fan speedwith the H symbol. The display window with all possibledisplays and their positions are shown here. Normally not allare shown at the same time but are included here to familiarizeyou with the names and symbols.



117

[IP05400( X)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090125-A

*[IP05500( X)01/95] Automatic operation

*[IP05600( X)02/95] Push the AUTOMATIC button and select the desiredtemperature. The selected temperature and AUTO will be shownin the display window. The EATC will automatically heat orcool to achieve the set temperature. Under normal conditions,your EATC will need no additional attention.

[IP05700( X)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090126-A


118

[IP05800( X)03/95] When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditions require heat, airwill be sent to the floor. However, a feature is included in yourEATC to prevent blowing cold air to the floor if the enginecoolant is not warm enough to allow heating. In 3 1/2 minutesor less, the fan speed will start to increase and the air flow willbe to the floor area.

[IP05900( X)07/94] If unusual conditions exist (i.e. window fogging, etc.), the sixmanual override buttons allow you to select special airdischarge locations. A thumbwheel allows you to adjust the fanspeed to suit your needs.

*[IP06000( X)03/95] Temperature selection

[IP06100( X)03/95] The RED and BLUE buttons at the upper left of the Control arefor temperature selection. The RED button will increase the settemperature and the BLUE button will lower the settemperature. Pressing a button and releasing it will change theset temperature one degree. Holding either button in willrapidly change the temperature setting in one degree incrementsto either 65˚F (18˚C) (BLUE) or 85˚F (29˚C) (RED). Then, the settemperature will jump 5˚ and stop at either 60˚F (16˚C) which ismaximum cooling or 90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating.When you select 60˚F (16˚C) or 90˚F (32˚C), the fan will go toHI speed for maximum airflow.



119

[IP06200( X)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090133-A

*[IP06300( X)06/94] The average temperature range used is between 68˚F (20˚C) and78˚F (26˚C). Changing the temperature setting by severaldegrees outside this range will not speed up the heating orcooling process.

*[IP06400( X)01/95] Fan speed and thumbwheel

[IP06500( X)05/95] Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speed to the existingconditions. You must push AUTOMATIC for automatic fanspeed operation. To control the fan speed yourself, use thethumbwheel which will cancel the automatic fan speed control.The thumbwheel is located at the extreme right side of theEATC control panel and is marked with a H symbol. Rotate upfor HI and down for LO speeds.


120

[IP06600( X)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090134-A

[IP06700( X)03/95] When you move the thumbwheel, the fan speed will go tomanual control. The display window will show the H symbolin the upper left corner along with the selected temperature andoperating function.

[IP06800( X)03/95] You can override the fan speed at any time. If you use thethumbwheel to override the fan speed, the EATC will continueto control the temperature but you control the fan speed. If youare operating in one of the override functions (FLOOR, MAXA/C, etc.), automatic fan control will continue unless you rotatethe fan thumbwheel. To return to automatic fan control, pressthe AUTOMATIC button. The EATC will return to automaticoperation. If you want to return to any override function, pressthe button for that function. The fan speed will continue to beautomatically controlled.



121

[IP06900( X)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090127-A

*[IP07000( X)01/95] Manual override buttons

[IP07100( X)03/95] Your EATC has six buttons which allow you to make specialselections. The buttons are located along the bottom edge of theEATC Control and allow you to determine where the air will bedischarged. Pressing any override button changes the airdischarge location only. It does not affect the ability of thesystem to control temperature or the fan speed. Return to fullyautomatic operation by pushing the AUTOMATIC button.

[IP07200( X)07/94] MAX A/C Button

[IP07300( X)03/95] MAX A/C allows for faster cooling because air is drawn frominside the vehicle. Using inside air causes the fan to soundlouder which is normal for this selection. The display windowwill change to indicate 60˚F (16˚C) and MAX A/C. The fan willrun at high speed and the air flow will be from the instrumentpanel registers. To exit and return to the previous temperature,push AUTOMATIC or any of the other 5 override buttons.


122

[IP07400( X)07/94] VENT Button

[IP07500( X)03/95] Push this button to select outside air through the instrumentpanel registers. The display window will show the settemperature and VENT to the lower right of the temperature.Your EATC will heat the air if the temperature you haveselected is warmer than the outside air coming into the vehicle.However, the air will NOT be cooled regardless of thetemperature setting. Airflow will be from the instrument panelregisters.

[IP07600( X)03/95] PNL & FLR Button

*[IP07700( X)03/95] Push this button to get air from the floor and instrument panelregisters at the same time. The display will show the settemperature and the words PNL and FLR. Depending on theselected temperature, the air will be automatically heated orcooled.

[IP07800( X)07/94] FLOOR Button

[IP07900( X)03/95] Airflow will be to the floor when the FLOOR button is pressed.The display window will show the set temperature and FLR tothe left of the temperature. The air cannot be cooled in theFLOOR position, only heated. Fan speed will be automaticunless manually controlled. If you override the fan speed andwish to return to automatic fan control, push AUTOMATIC.Then, again select FLOOR for airflow to the floor.

[IP08000( X)07/94] FLR & DEF Button

[IP08100( X)03/95] Push this button to get air to the floor and windshielddefrosters at the same time. The display will show the settemperature, FLR and V symbol to indicate FLR & DEF hasbeen selected. If the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) orwarmer, the air will be dehumidified to remove moisture. Thiswill help to prevent fogging in humid weather.



123

[IP08200( X)04/95] DEF V Button

[IP08300( X)03/95] Press the defrost button to obtain maximum airflow to thewindshield. Adjust the temperature setting as required fordefrosting. The display window will show the temperaturesetting and V symbol to the left of the temperature. When theoutside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) or warmer, the air willbe dehumidified to remove moisture.

[IP08400( X)07/94] REAR FAN OFF Button

[IP08500( X)03/95] Press this button once to turn on the rear fan circuit. Press thebutton again to turn the rear fan off. REAR FAN OFF will beshown in the display window above the set temperature.

[IP08600( X)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090128-A

*[IP08700( X)04/95] Operating tips

*[IP08800( X)04/95] The following tips will help you to get the most satisfactionfrom your Electronic Automatic Temperature Control system.

*[IP08900( X)07/95] ■ In humid weather, select DEF V before starting yourengine. This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After afew minutes of operation, switch to AUTOMATIC or anoverride selection of your choice.


124

*[IP09000( X)04/95] ■ To prevent humidity buildup inside your vehicle, alwaysdrive with the EATC System turned on.

*[IP09100( X)03/95] ■ Do not put objects under the front seats that interfere withthe flow of air to the back seat area.

[IP09200( X)03/95] ■ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air intake area ofyour EATC System which could block the air intake. Theintake area is located at the bottom of the windshield.

*[IP09300( X)04/95] Service

*[IP09400( X)04/95] If your EATC is not operating as described here, take it to yourdealer to have it checked. System diagnostics are built in whichwill allow your dealer to readily identify problems that mightoccur.

[IP09500( X)10/94] Rear Fan and Airflow Operation

*[IP09600( X)03/95] Fan speed adjustment

[IP09700( X)05/95] The H (right) knob controls the volume of air flow. Rotate theknob upward to increase fan speed and increase the amount ofair entering the vehicle. Three fan speed positions are availableand are indicated by dots beside the H knob. The largest dot ishigh speed position.

[IP09800( X)10/94] In O (OFF), all blower motor operation is stopped.

*[IP09900( X)08/94] Airflow selections

[IP10000( X)05/95] Q (Vent)

[IP10100( X)05/95] Airflow will be to the upper console registers when Q isselected.

*[IP10200( X)08/95] R (Floor)

[IP10300( X)05/95] Airflow will be to the floor when R is selected.



125

[IP10400( X)10/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021271-ARear climate controls


126

%*[IP12300( X)06/95] Rear Window Defroster (If equipped)

*[IP12400( X)12/91] The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin icefrom both the inside and outside of the rear window.

[IP12500( X)10/94] The control switch is located on the instrument panel to theright of the radio.

[IP12700( X)08/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020110-H

Rear window defroster switch

*[IP12800( X)02/95] To defrost the rear window:

*[IP12900( X)02/95] 1. Clear any snow from the rear window.

*[IP13000( X)09/93] 2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine.

[IP13200( X)06/94] 3. Push the switch and release. The indicator light turns on.Push switch again to turn off.

*[IP13300( X)02/05] The defroster turns off automatically after approximately 10minutes. If the window is not clear, turn on the defroster again.It will also automatically shut off any time the engine is shutoff.

%*[IP13400( X)09/95] NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or window cleaners withabrasives to clean the inside of your rear window. Ifyou do, you may damage the heating elements thatare bonded to the inside of the rear window andcause damage to the rear window defroster.



127

[IP15800( X)10/94] Liftgate Wiper and Washer (If equipped)[IP15901( X)10/94] The wiper/washer switch is to the right of the radio. To turn on

the wiper, rotate the wiper/washer switch to the WIPE position.To select an interval wipe rotate switch between OFF and HI.To turn on the washer, push the switch all the way in and holdfor spray. Release the button and the spray stops, but the wipercontinues to operate. To turn off the wiper, rotate the switch tothe OFF position.

[IP15950( X)12/92] For information about refilling the liftgate washer fluid orreplacing your liftgate wiper blade, see Windshield washer fluidand Windshield wipers in the Index.

[IP16000( X)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090189-A

Liftgate wiper/washer button

%*[IP16800(ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights%*[IP16900(ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights

*[IP17000(ALL)09/95] To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, marker lamps,license plate lamps and tail lamps, use the headlamp controlknob to the left of the steering column.

[IP17100(ALL)09/95] 1. Rotate the headlamp control knob to the first position.Parking lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps and markerlamps are now on.

[IP17200(ALL)06/94] 2. Rotate the headlamp control knob to the next position.Headlamps are now on in addition to the above.


128

[IP17250(ALL)09/95] 3. Rotate the thumb wheel when the headlamp control knob isin an “ON” position to brighten or dim the instrument panellamps. Rotate fully upward to operate courtesy and cargolamps.

[IP17260(ALL)09/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090190-AHeadlamp control knob

%*[IP17301( X)02/95] Setting the Autolamp Delay System (If equipped)

*[IP17320( X)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and offautomatically. You can use the autolamp to:

*[IP17340( X)01/95] ■ turn on the lamps automatically at night

*[IP17360( X)01/95] ■ turn off the lamps automatically during daylight

*[IP17380( X)01/95] ■ keep the lamps on for up to three minutes after you turn thekey to OFF.



129

[IP17390( X)12/95] Your vehicle may have one of the following autolamp systemsdepending on when it was built:

[IP17400( X)1/96]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020974-C

[IP17405( X)12/95] OR

[IP17410( X)12/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090216-A

[IP17415( X)12/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the first autolamp (with theON/OFF button) use the following directions:

*[IP17420( X)01/95] To set the autolamp:

[IP17440( X)05/95] 1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. If theswitch for the headlamps is ON, you cancel the autolamp.


130

*[IP17460( X)01/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start your vehicle.

[IP17490( X)12/92] 3. Find the autolamp delay slide knob on the right hand side ofthe mirror.

[IP17510( X)12/92] 4. Slide the knob all the way to the left.

[IP17528( X)03/93] 5. Press the autolamp “On/Off” button. An indicator light willglow when the autolamp is on.

[IP17530( X)06/93] 6. The autolamp automatically turns the lamps on and off.

*[IP17570( X)03/93] To turn the autolamp off, press the On/Off button. Theindicator light will turn off.

[IP17572( X)12/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the second autolamp (withoutthe ON/OFF button) use the following directions:

[IP17574( X)12/95] 1. Make sure the headlamp is in the OFF position. If the switchfor the headlamps is ON, you will override the autolamp.

[IP17576( X)12/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start your vehicle.

[IP17578( X)12/95] 3. Find the autolamp delay slide knob in the center of themirror.

[IP17580( X)12/95] 4. Slide the knob to the center of travel.

[IP17582( X)12/95] 5. The autolamp automatically turns the lamps ON and OFF.

[IP17584( X)12/95] To turn the autolamp OFF, slide the knob all the way to theleft.

*[IP17600( X)12/92] You can set the autolamp so the lamps stay on for up to threeminutes after you turn your vehicle off.

*[IP17601( X)01/95] To keep the lamps on after you leave your vehicle:

*[IP17630( X)10/94] ■ Move the slider knob to the right. Once the slider knob is tothe right, it controls how long the lamps stay on.



131

*[IP17660( X)12/93] ■ The further you move the slide knob toward the right, thelonger the headlamps stay on after you leave your vehicle.Similarly, if you move the slide knob only slightly towardthe left, the headlamps stay on for only a moment after youturn your vehicle off.

%*[IP17715(ALL)04/95] Fog Lamps (If equipped)

[IP17725(ALL)03/95] The fog lamps switch is located on the instrument panel to theright of the radio and climate control.

[IP17730(ALL)05/95] ■ To turn the fog lamps on, turn on the low-beam headlamps,then push the fog lamp switch. An indicator light will glowwhen the lamps are on.

*[IP17735(ALL)10/94] ■ To turn off, push the switch again.

[IP17750(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090191-A

Fog lamp switch

*[IP17760(ALL)02/93] The fog lamps act as a supplement to the low beam headlampsunder limited visibility conditions such as rain, snow, dust orfog and operate only when the low beam headlamps are on.

*[IP17770(ALL)02/93] To maximize fog lamp bulb life it is recommended that the foglamp switch be turned off after each use prior to turning off theheadlamps.


132

%*[IP17780(ALL)08/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[IP17785(ALL)08/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasivecleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches orcrack the lamps.

%*[IP17815(ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System

*[IP17820(ALL)03/95] (Canadian vehicles only)

*[IP17830(ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns the high beamheadlamps on, with a reduced light output, when:

*[IP17840(ALL)03/95] ■ The headlamp system is in the OFF position, and

*[IP17850(ALL)01/95] ■ The vehicle has a fully released parking brake.

*[IP17860(ALL)05/95] The high beam indicator light on the instrument cluster will notbe on.

*[IP17890(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will notilluminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn onyour headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.

%*[IP17900(ALL)03/95] Lighting Up the Instrument Panel and the Interior ofYour Vehicle

[IP18000(ALL)10/94] The instrument panel lights can be turned on by turning theheadlamp knob toward either the first or second position. Youcan brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by rotating thethumb wheel.

[IP18200(ALL)03/95] The interior lights will shut off after 25 seconds with all thedoors closed, or immediately when the ignition switch is turnedto the ON position, or if the vehicle speed is above five MPH(8 km/h). The interior lights will turn off after 40 minutes ifany of the doors are left open. Refer to Battery Saver in theFeatures section for more details.



133

[IP18400( X)03/95] Cargo and Map Lamps

[IP19100( X)08/94] The cargo lamp is located on the roof headliner near the liftgate.The lamp will come on whenever the driver’s door orpassenger’s door is open or when the headlamp switchthumbwheel is rotated fully upward.

%*[IP19187(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps

*[IP19188(ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic andshould be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinsethem with clear water.

[IP19700(ALL)04/95] Dome/Map Lamps (If equipped)

*[IP19800( X)08/95] The map lamps are located inside the dome lamp assembly, oneach side of the dome lamp. Each lamp has its own switch.

[IP19815( X)03/93] If you have the Explorer Limited, the map lamps are located inthe overhead console. Each lamp has its own switch.

[IP19850( X)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090188-A

Map lamps


134

[IP19875( X)09/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020975-BMap lamps (if equipped)

%*[IP19900( X)10/94] High-mount Brakelamp

[IP19910( X)10/94] The high-mount brakelamp is located outside the vehicle,directly over the rear window.

[IP19920( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica art:0021015-E

High-mount brakelamp

*[IP20300(ALL)04/95] Clock Controls on Electronic Radios[IP20400(ALL)10/94] The electronic radios have a built-in clock. For complete

operating instructions, refer to Electronic Sound Systems in thisOwner Guide.


135

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00400(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed togive you easy access to the controls while you are driving.

%*[SC00500(ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

*[SC00600(ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steeringcolumn to:

*[SC00700(ALL)03/95] ■ operate the turn signals and cornering lamps

*[SC00800(ALL)01/95] ■ turn the high beams on/off

*[SC00900(ALL)05/95] ■ flash the lamps

*[SC01000(ALL)01/95] ■ turn the windshield wipers and washer on/off

%*[SC01100(ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

[SC01600(ALL)07/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090131-B

Turn signal lever and functions

*[SC01800(ALL)11/89] If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does notilluminate or remains on (doesn’t flash) when you signal a turn,the turn signaling system is malfunctioning. Have this conditioncorrected as soon as possible, but make sure that you use theaccepted hand signals in the meantime.

File:07unscx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996

136

%*[SC03200(ALL)08/95] High Beams and Flashing the Lamps

[SC03500(ALL)03/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090130-A

Headlamp high beam switch and turn signal lever on steering column

%*[SC04400(ALL)08/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer

*[SC04500(ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition key must beturned to the ON or ACC position.

[SC04900(ALL)08/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020084-DInterval wiper on turn signal lever

*[SC05000(ALL)02/95] To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at the end of the turnsignal lever toward or away from the instrument panel to theinterval operation you desire.



137

[SC05200(ALL)06/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of the wiper knob fora single wipe. For a constant spray, keep the knob pushed in.After you release the knob, the wipers operate for two to threecycles before turning off (if wipers were off) or returning to theinterval setting selected.

*[SC05300(ALL)08/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluidcontainer is empty or activate the washers at any time for morethan 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washerpump system.

[SC05350(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The addition of shields to the front of the vehicle, asused to deflect bugs, may also adversely affect thewasher system from delivering fluid to thewindshield. Devices such as bug shields are notrecommended to be added to your vehicle.

*[SC05400(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze onthe windshield and obscure your vision. Always warmup the windshield with the defroster before you use thewasher fluid. If you cannot see through the windshieldclearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in acollision.

*[SC05500(ALL)08/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacingyour windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid andWipers in the Index.


138

[SC05502(ALL)10/94] Gearshift Lever (Automatic transmissiononly)

[SC05504( X)08/94] The gearshift lever on your Explorer is mounted on the steeringcolumn. On the end of the gearshift lever is the OverdriveOn/Off button. For additional information about the gearshiftlever and the Overdrive On/Off button, see the Driving YourExplorer chapter.

[SC05508(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021255-A

*[SC05510(ALL)11/93] OVERDRIVE OFF Lamp

[SC05512(ALL)03/95] This lamp indicates the operating range of the transmission.This lamp illuminates when the O/D ON/OFF button isdepressed. For additional information, refer to the WarningLights and Gauges chapter.

[SC05514(ALL)07/95]




139

%*[SC05516(ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher

*[SC05520(ALL)04/95] The hazard flasher is used to alert other drivers to hazardoussituations.

*[SC05527(ALL)10/94] The flashers will flash and the high-mount brakelamp will stayon steadily (not flash) with the brake pedal depressed.

*[SC05530(ALL)08/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. Theflashers work for up to two hours when the battery is fullycharged and in good condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or ifthe battery is not fully charged, the battery power can bedrained.

*[SC05540(ALL)09/93] To use the hazard flasher:

*[SC05550(ALL)10/92] 1. Push in the flasher button; it will pop out and the lamps willbegin to flash.

*[SC05560(ALL)10/92] 2. To stop the flashers, push in the flasher button again.

*[SC05562(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The flasher button will be sticking up slightly higherwhen on than when off.

[SC05590(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020079-DHazard flasher


140

%*[SC05600(ALL)01/95] Horn

*[SC05700(ALL)02/95] To sound the horn, press the center of the horn pad. Check thehorn regularly to make sure it operates properly.

[SC06000(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020890-DHorn location

%*[SC06200(ALL)05/95] Tilt Steering (If equipped)


Never adjust the steering column/wheel when the vehicleis moving. You could lose control of the vehicle andinjure someone.

[SC06400(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020088-D

Tilt steering wheel lever



141

*[SC06450(ALL)09/95] To change the position of the steering wheel, push the releaselever under the steering column away from you. Tip thesteering wheel to the desired position. Pull the lever back intoplace to lock the steering wheel.

*[SC07250(ALL)12/89] Be sure the steering wheel locks in a notch. It is not infinitelyadjustable. Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle isin motion.

%*[SC07300(ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)

*[SC07400(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you can automaticallymaintain a constant speed at or above 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC07450(ALL)06/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the CanadianRadio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) approvedmay cause the speed control to malfunction. Therefore, use onlyproperly installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.

[SC07500(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020091-F

The speed control switches

*[SC07800(ALL)08/95] To set the speed control:

*[SC08000(ALL)08/95] 1. Press and release the ON switch.

[SC08100(ALL)02/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph (48 km/h)using the accelerator pedal.


142

[SC08300(ALL)03/95] 3. Press SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately. Thiswill set your speed. If you keep this switch pressed, yourspeed will continue to increase and will not be set until theswitch is released.

*[SC08500(ALL)08/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle willmaintain the speed you set.

*[SC08600(ALL)08/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle maymomentarily slow down or speed up, even though the speedcontrol is on. This is normal.

[SC08630(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an automatictransmission, and if your speed increases above yourset speed while driving in j (Overdrive) on adownhill grade, you may want to shift to D (Drive) toreduce vehicle speed. This can be accomplished bypushing in the Transmission Control switch which islocated on the end of the gearshift lever. The speedcontrol cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goesabove your set speed on a downhill grade. For thebest fuel economy during normal driving conditions,leave the shift select in j (Overdrive), or resume assoon as practical.

[SC08675(ALL)03/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 5 speed manualtransmission, and if your speed increases above yourset speed while driving in 5 (Fifth) gear on a downhillgrade, you may want to shift to 4 (Fourth) gear toreduce vehicle speed. Depressing the clutch pedalcancels speed control, therefore speed control must bereset by pressing the SET ACCEL or RESUMEswitches. Speed control cannot reduce the vehiclespeed if it goes above your set speed on a downhillgrade.



143


Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roadsthat are winding, slippery, or unpaved.

*[SC08801(ALL)05/95] In mountainous areas, at higher elevations, or when pulling atrailer, the speed control may not be able to maintain the presetspeed with the transmission in j (Overdrive).

*[SC08850(ALL)06/92] If your vehicle comes with a 5-speed manual transmission, youmay prefer to drive in 4 (Fourth) gear, in mountainous areas orat high altitudes, to improve speed control performance.

*[SC09275(ALL)12/91] In order to downshift (with a manual transmission) with thespeed control operating, you must press either the brake orclutch pedal long enough to disengage the speed control. Wait asecond before depressing the clutch again and making the shiftso that the speed control can fully return to the idle position.


Do not shift the transmission into N (Neutral) with thespeed control on.

[SC09350(ALL)03/95] To maintain a preset speed under the above conditions, withelectronically controlled transmissions — press the TransmissionControl Switch (TCS). The indicator light will turn on andilluminate the words “O/D OFF.” This will cancel “Overdrive.”You can press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) on or offat any speed. For the best fuel economy during normal drivingconditions, press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) to turnoff the light. This allows overdrive operation.


144

[SC09375(ALL)10/94]

quarter page

art:0021255-A Transmission control switch

%*[SC09400(ALL)08/95] Accelerating With the Speed Control Operating

*[SC09500(ALL)08/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up momentarily.When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.

%*[SC09600(ALL)08/95] Resetting the Speed Control

*[SC09700(ALL)06/95] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, press and hold theCOAST switch. Let your vehicle slow down to the desiredspeed and release the COAST switch.

*[SC09750(ALL)10/94] Your vehicle has a “tap-down” feature that allows you todecrease your current speed in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h)by a momentary tap of the COAST switch. Multiple taps of theCOAST switch will decrease your vehicle speed 1 mph(1.6 km/h) for each tap. For example, if you are currently set at65 mph (104 km/h) and tap the COAST switch 5 times yourvehicle speed will decrease and set at 60 mph (96 km/h).

*[SC09800(ALL)06/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed, you can followany of these procedures:

[SC09900(ALL)08/94] ■ Accelerate to the desired speed, then press the SET ACCELswitch and release it immediately.

[SC10100(ALL)08/94] ■ Press and hold the SET ACCEL switch, then accelerate toyour desired speed and release the switch.



145

*[SC10250(ALL)10/94] ■ TAP-UP — This allows you to increase your current speed inincrements of 1 mph (1.6 km/h) by a momentary tap of theSET-ACCEL switch. Multiple taps of the SET-ACCEL switchwill increase your vehicle speed 1 mph (1.6 km/h) for eachtap. For example, if you are currently set at 60 mph(96 km/h) and tap the SET-ACCEL switch 5 times yourvehicle speed will increase and set at 65 mph (104 km/h).

*[SC10300(ALL)06/95] Turning the Speed Control Off

*[SC10400(ALL)06/95] You can cancel the speed control while you are driving.

[SC10550(ALL)08/94] ■ Press the OFF switch. The speed control is off. If you wantto resume speed control, press the ON switch and reset thespeed control by pressing the SET ACCEL switch.

[SC10600(ALL)06/94] ■ Press the brake or clutch pedal slightly. The speed control issuspended, but you can reset it by pressing SET ACCEL orreturn to the previous set speed with the RSM switch.

*[SC10800(ALL)10/95] In addition, the speed control is turned off each time you turnthe vehicle ignition off.

*[SC11100(ALL)11/89] Driving uphill or on a steep grade

*[SC11200(ALL)05/95] When the speed control is on, your vehicle may significantlydrop speed when driving uphill, especially with a heavy load. Ifthe speed drops more than 8 to 14 mph (15 - 25 km/h) theautomatic speed control will, by design, be canceled. You mayhave to temporarily resume manual speed control while drivingup a steep grade in order to maintain the speed you desire.

[SC11300(ALL)05/95] If the speed control “dropped out” after your climb iscompleted, the speed of your light truck can be reset with theSET ACCEL switch, or returned to the previous set speed withthe RSM switch, as long as you are driving over 30 mph(50 km/h).


146

%*[SC11500(ALL)08/95] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed

*[SC11600(ALL)06/95] If you press the brake pedal, the speed control is cancelled. Youcan return to the speed you set by using the RSM switch, aslong as you did not press the OFF switch.

*[SC11700(ALL)08/95] To resume the speed you had before, you must be driving atleast 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC11800(ALL)05/93] Press and release the RSM switch. Your vehicle graduallyreturns to the previously set speed and then maintains it.


If your vehicle has speed control, do not use it onslippery roads. You could lose control of your vehicleand could injure someone.

[SC12000( X)06/95] Speed Control Indicator (If equipped)

[SC12100( X)08/94] A SPEED CONTROL light is displayed in the instrument clusterwhen the speed control system is engaged. The display will turnoff when the brake pedal is pressed or if speed control is shutoff.

*[SC12200( X)05/95] This display does not indicate any problems with the speedcontrol, but is simply a convenient way of knowing when it isactive.


147

Features

*[FV00350(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for yourcomfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find outabout standard and optional features.

%*[FV00601(ALL)01/95] Doors

*[FV00701(ALL)06/95] Door Handles and Locks

[FV00901( X)08/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0020548-CInside handles

File:08unfvx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996

148

[FV01502( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021367-AOutside handles and locks

[FV01600( X)10/95] Two step unlock feature (if equipped)

[FV01620( X)10/95] This feature allows you to unlock all vehicle doors with the key.

[FV01640( X)10/95] 1. Unlock driver door with key.

[FV01660( X)12/95] 2. Repeat unlock procedure within 5 seconds. All doors willunlock when the key is returned to the vertical position(position of the key before removal).

[FV01680( X)10/95] NOTE: This feature can be activated by all outside locks onvehicles equipped with keyless entry.

%*[FV01801(ALL)03/95] Anti-theft front door lock knobs

*[FV01901(ALL)10/89] Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to preclude unlocking thedoor by pulling up on the bullet type lock knob. To unlock andopen the front door from the inside of the vehicle, pull on theinside door handle.


Features

149

[FV02001( X)01/91] Setting the Childproof Locks for the Rear Doors

*[FV02101( X)03/95] In addition to standard or power locks, your vehicle haschildproof locks for the rear doors. If you set these locks, therear doors cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle. Thedoors can still be opened from the outside when the lock knobsare raised.

[FV02300( X)08/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0020545-CThe child lock lever

*[FV02401( X)03/95] To set the childproof lock on each rear door, open the reardoor.

[FV02601( X)01/95] Find the lever near the white label with the word LOCKED ingreen letters. Move the lever up.

*[FV02801( X)03/95] To release the childproof lock, open the rear door from theoutside.

*[FV03001( X)06/95] Move the lever down.


150

[FV04900( X)08/94] Liftgate Handle and Locks

[FV05000( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica art:0020550-F

Liftgate handle and locks

[FV05100( X)11/89] You can unlock the liftgate by using the key. To open theliftgate, rotate the handle clockwise and to open the liftgatewindow, rotate the handle counterclockwise.

[FV05200( X)05/95] You can lock the liftgate by using the key, pushing the lockbutton down, or using the power door lock switch on the leftside of the cargo area.

*[FV05300( X)10/89] Make certain that you close the liftgate door and window beforedriving your vehicle. If you do not, possible damage may occurto the liftgate door lift cylinders and attaching hardware.

*[FV05400( X)08/95] RWARNING

When driving your vehicle make sure that the liftgatedoor and window are closed to prevent exhaust fumesfrom being drawn into the vehicle. This will also preventcargo from falling out.

*[FV05900( X)12/93] The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. Youcan open and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. Itcannot be opened from inside the cargo area.


Features

151

[FV11000( X)05/95] Cargo Area Shade (If equipped)

[FV11201( X)03/91] This removable shade hides cargo and also secures lightweightobjects in the cargo area of your vehicle.

*[FV11401( X)03/91] To install the shade:

*[FV11601( X)05/90] 1. Position the shade in the mounting brackets located behindthe rear seat on each rear trim panel.

[FV11700( X)05/95] The tongue end of the shade should face the rear of yourvehicle.

*[FV11801( X)03/93] 2. Grasp the end of the shade and pull it toward you.

*[FV12001( X)05/90] 3. Hook the sides of the outstretched shade to notch in the reartrim panels near the liftgate opening.

[FV12200( X)05/95] RWARNING

To avoid possible injury during a sudden stop or acollision, the cover should be attached to the brackets,when not in use.


152

[FV12400( X)10/94]

17-1/2 pica art:0020547-F

The cargo shade

*[FV12600( X)05/91] The shade is a wind-up type, just like a window shade. Overtime the shade may lose its spring tension. If this happens, youcan easily rewind the shade with the help of another person.

*[FV12700( X)05/91] To rewind the shade:

[FV12800( X)06/94] 1. Remove the shade from its side anchor slots by compressingtelescoping tube.

*[FV12900( X)05/91] 2. Extend the shade fully. Make sure the smooth grain side isfacing you (see Figure 1).

*[FV13000( X)05/91] 3. Wrap the vinyl around the roller tube two times in thedirection shown in Figure 1.

*[FV13100( X)05/91] 4. Tuck the edges of the vinyl inside the end cap with eachwrap.


Features

153

*[FV13200( X)05/91] 5. Fold the edges of the vinyl toward the center. Make sure theedges of the vinyl clear the end cap slots (see Figure 2). Usemasking tape or a rubber band to hold the vinyl on the leftside of the roller tube.

*[FV13300( X)05/91] 6. While holding the vinyl and roller tube as shown in Figure2, push the right end cap (marked with an “R”) about 1/4inch to disengage the clutch.

*[FV13400( X)05/91] 7. Wind the shade 14 revolutions in the direction shown inFigure 2. (The wind direction is also marked on the endcap.)

[FV13500( X)05/94]

10-1/2 pica



154

[FV13600( X)05/94]

10-1/2 pica


*[FV13700( X)05/91] 8. Let go of the right end cap. The clutch should now engageand stop the shade from losing its spring tension.

*[FV13800( X)05/91] 9. Unfold the vinyl and place it into the end cap slots.

*[FV13900( X)05/91] 10. With the vinyl fully wound around the roller tube, insert theshade into the side mounting brackets. NOTE: The openingfor the right mounting bracket is narrower than the left.

*[FV14000( X)05/91] 11. Check to see that the shade operates properly.


Features

155

%*[FV14100(ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV14500( X)05/95] The power door lock switches are located in the front doors andin the driver side trim panel of the cargo area. To lock all doorspush the switch button marked L. To unlock all doors push theswitch button marked U.

*[FV14701(ALL)03/91] The manual door locks will override the power door lockcontrols.

[FV15201( X)04/94]

24 pica art:0020553-C

Power door lock controls


156

%*[FV15203( X)09/95] Using the Keyless Entry System (If equipped)

*[FV15205( X)02/95] If your vehicle has the keyless entry system, you can lock orunlock the vehicle doors without using a key. The buttons forthe system are near the outside door handle on the driver’sside. See also Remote Entry System which follows thisdescription.

[FV15207( X)02/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021158-AKeyless entry buttons

*[FV15209( X)02/95] When you bought your vehicle, you were given a computercode that operates the system for your vehicle. For yourconvenience, we have duplicated this code in two places.

*[FV15211( X)09/95] The code is:

*[FV15213( X)09/95] ■ on your owner’s wallet card found in the glove compartment

*[FV15217( X)02/95] ■ taped to the computer module

*[FV15219( X)05/95] When you use this entry system, the illuminated entry systemturns on the interior lights for 25 seconds and the buttons onthe keypad light up for 5 seconds. Do not push the buttonswith a key, ballpoint pen, pencil or any other hard object. Theseobjects could damage the buttons.


Features

157

%*[FV15273( X)09/95] Programming your own entry code

*[FV15275( X)02/95] You can program a personal code to unlock your vehicle withthe keypad. This code does not replace the permanent code thatthe dealership gave you. Use your personal code in the samemanner as you would your original code.

*[FV15277( X)09/95] To program your own code:

*[FV15279( X)09/95] 1. Select five digits for your personal code.

*[FV15281( X)09/95] 2. Enter the permanent code that the dealership gave you.

*[FV15283( X)09/95] 3. Within five seconds, press 1/2.

*[FV15285( X)09/95] 4. Within five seconds of pressing 1/2, enter your personalcode, pressing each digit within five seconds of the previousdigit.

*[FV15287( X)09/95] The keyless entry system registers this second code. To openyour vehicle, you can now use either code. The moduleremembers only one personal code at a time. Entering asecond personal code will erase the first, replacing it withthe new second one.

*[FV15289( X)09/95] To erase your personal code:

*[FV15291( X)09/95] 1. Enter the original permanent code.

*[FV15293( X)09/95] 2. Press 1/2 within five seconds of Step 1.

*[FV15295( X)09/95] 3. Wait six seconds.

*[FV15297( X)09/95] The keyless entry system automatically erases your personalcode. The system will now only respond to the permanentcode.

*[FV15299( X)09/95] Do not set a code that presents the numbers in sequential order,such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0. Studies show that people whoidly press the buttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also,do not select a code that uses the same button five times.Thieves can easily figure out these types of codes.


158

%*[FV15301( X)09/95] Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system

*[FV15303( X)02/95] You must unlock the driver’s door before you unlock any of theother doors. If you let more than five seconds pass betweenpressing numbers, the system shuts down, and you have toenter the code again. The system has shut down if the keypadlight is out. If the keyless entry system does not work properly,use the key or transmitter(s) to lock and unlock the doors.

*[FV15305( X)09/95] 1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory code or yourpersonal code. All codes have five numbers. After you pressthe fifth number, the driver’s door unlocks.

[FV15307( X)04/95] 2. To unlock the passenger’s door(s), press the 3/4 buttonwithin five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door or re-enterthe code to open the driver’s door, then press 3/4.

*[FV15309( X)09/95] Locking the doors with the keyless entry system

*[FV15311( X)09/95] Along with unlocking your doors, you can use the keyless entrysystem to lock the doors. You can also use the Autolock featureto automatically lock the doors after you get in the vehicle.

*[FV15313( X)02/95] To lock all of the doors, press 7/8 and 9/0 at the same time. Itis not necessary to first enter the keypad code. This will armyour factory installed anti-theft system, if so equipped.

*[FV15320( X)05/95] Arming, disarming and resetting your anti-theftsystem (If equipped) from the keyless entry pad

*[FV15330( X)05/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional factory installedanti-theft system, the keyless entry system will arm it when youuse the 7/8 and 9/0 keys to lock the doors, and will disarm orreset a triggered anti-theft alarm when you enter in the fivedigit code to unlock the driver’s door.

*[FV15340( X)09/95] NOTE: Doors and the liftgate must be fully closed for theanti-theft system to arm. Refer to the Anti-TheftSystem section in this chapter for more details.


Features

159

% [FV15350( X)02/95] Autolock (With automatic transmission vehicles only)

*[FV15351( X)02/95] The Autolock feature is part of your remote keyless entrysystem and is enabled at the factory. With the Autolock featureenabled, all of the doors will automatically lock when:

[FV15353( X)02/95] ■ the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate window are fullyclosed

*[FV15355( X)09/95] ■ the ignition key is turned to the ON position

*[FV15356( X)02/95] ■ the brake pedal is pressed

*[FV15358( X)02/95] ■ you shift through (Reverse)

*[FV15359( X)02/95] ■ the brake pedal is released

*[FV15360( X)09/95] The Autolock feature will repeat when:

[FV15361( X)02/95] ■ a door is opened and then all doors, liftgate and liftgatewindow are closed

*[FV15362( X)02/95] ■ the brake pedal is released

*[FV15363( X)04/95] You can deactivate the system by using the buttons for thekeyless entry system if you don’t want to use the Autolockfeature.

*[FV15364( X)02/95] The doors may not lock automatically at the correct time if thedriver:

*[FV15365( X)02/95] ■ shifts through gears without pressing the brake

*[FV15366( X)02/95] ■ shifts through gears quickly after starting the vehicle

*[FV15367( X)02/95] ■ releases their foot from the brake while someone has steppedout of the vehicle for a moment

*[FV15368( X)05/95] To deactivate the Autolock system:

*[FV15369( X)06/95] 1. Enter your permanent five-digit entry code (not the personalcode you may have set).

*[FV15370( X)09/95] 2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold 7/8.


160

*[FV15371( X)09/95] 3. Within 5 more seconds, press and release 3/4.

*[FV15373( X)09/95] 4. Release 7/8.

*[FV15375( X)02/95] To reactivate the Autolock system, simply repeat the instructionsfor deactivating the system. By re-entering the code thatdeactivates the Autolock, the keyless entry system reinstates theAutolock feature.

*[FV15377( X)04/95] You can also deactivate or reactivate the Autolock feature bythis method:

[FV15379( X)02/95] 1. Make sure the anti-theft system is not armed or triggered,ignition is off, and all doors and liftgate window are closed.

*[FV15381( X)02/95] 2. Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN.

*[FV15383( X)02/95] 3. Press the door power unlock button 3 times.

*[FV15385( X)02/95] 4. Turn the ignition key from RUN to OFF.


*[FV15389( X)02/95] 6. Turn the ignition key back to RUN within 30 seconds of step2.

*[FV15391( X)02/95] 7. The horn should chirp once. If not, wait 30 seconds andrepeat steps 1 through 6.

*[FV15393( X)02/95] 8. Press the door power unlock button.

*[FV15395( X)02/95] 9. Press the door power lock button.

*[FV15397( X)02/95] 10. The horn will chirp once if the Autolock feature wasdeactivated, twice (one short chirp followed by a long chirp)if the Autolock feature was activated.

*[FV15399( X)02/95] 11. Turn the ignition OFF.

*[FV15401( X)02/95] 12. The horn will chirp once to confirm that you activated ordeactivated the Autolock feature.


Features

161

%*[FV15425(ALL)05/95] Remote Entry System (If equipped)

*[FV15500( X)02/95] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you can lock orunlock the vehicle doors and liftgate without using a key. Theremote also has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for thesystem are located on the two hand held transmitters that camewith your vehicle.

*[FV15600( X)06/95] The system will work with up to four transmitters. Your vehiclecame with two transmitters. Additional transmitters can beordered from your dealer.

*[FV15700(ALL)02/95] The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in theOFF position.

[FV15800(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021159-A

The remote entry transmitter

%*[FV15901(ALL)02/95] Unlocking the doors with the remote entry system

*[FV16001(ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.

*[FV16201( X)02/95] To unlock the other doors and liftgate, press the UNLOCKbutton a second time, within five seconds after the firstUNLOCK.

*[FV16300(ALL)02/95] Locking the doors with the remote entry system

*[FV16450( X)02/95] To lock all the doors and liftgate, press the LOCK button. Thiswill also arm the factory installed Anti-Theft system.

[FV16490( X)02/95] If you would like a signal that the doors are being locked, pressthe LOCK button again within five seconds. If all doors, liftgate


162

and the liftgate window are completely closed, the doors andliftgate will lock again, the horn will chirp and the externallamps will flash. If a door, liftgate or the liftgate window isopen or ajar, the horn will give two short chirps warning youthat a door or the liftgate is open.

%*[FV16800(ALL)02/95] Remote entry personal alarm

*[FV16900(ALL)02/95] If you wish to activate the remote entry system personal alarm,press the PANIC button. This will honk the horn and flash thelights for approximately 2 minutes 45 seconds. You can turn itoff by pressing the PANIC button again from the transmitter orby turning the ignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position.

*[FV17000(ALL)02/95] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK or PANIC buttons,the illuminated entry system turns on the vehicle’s interiorlights for 25 seconds. You can turn these lights off with theremote entry LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the ONor ACCESSORY position.

[FV17100(ALL)03/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0021160-A

%*[FV17200(ALL)04/95] Arming and Disarming the Alarm System with RemoteEntry

*[FV17350(ALL)04/95] Your Remote Entry System will automatically arm the factoryinstalled Anti-Theft System when the doors are locked, andautomatically disarm it when the doors are unlocked. Theremote will also reset the anti-theft alarm (when the driver’sdoor is unlocked or the PANIC button is pressed on aprogrammed remote entry transmitter) if it was triggered.


Features

163

*[FV17400(ALL)04/95] The remote entry system may not arm and disarm non-factoryinstalled anti-theft systems.

[FV17425( X)03/95] Remote Memory Seat Feature (If equipped)

[FV17452( X)03/95] Your vehicle allows the remote keyless entry system to controlthe Memory Seat system (see Memory Seat section of this OwnerGuide). With this feature, each of the first three transmittersprogrammed will recall a different seat position.

[FV17453( X)03/95] The feature is turned on at the factory for your convenience.

[FV17454( X)05/93] Pressing the transmitter UNLOCK button once will unlock thedriver’s door and move the seat to its corresponding memoryseat position, just as if you had pressed the memory seat buttonin the vehicle.

*[FV17456( X)01/95] When your dealer programs new transmitters, the order ofprogramming controls seat recall as follows:

[FV17458( X)03/95] ■ First transmitter programmed — recall seat position #1

[FV17460( X)03/95] ■ Second transmitter programmed — recall seat position #2

[FV17462( X)03/95] ■ Third transmitter programmed — recall seat position #3

[FV17464( X)03/95] ■ Fourth transmitter programmed — NO recall (Memory Seatallows only three memory positions)

[FV17466( X)05/03] You may change seat positions at any time. Once programmed,Transmitter #1 will always move the seat to position #1.

[FV17483( X)03/95] You can deactivate or reactivate the remote Memory Seatfeature:

[FV17485( X)02/95] 1. Make sure the anti-theft system is not armed or triggered,ignition is off, and all doors and liftgate window are closed.

*[FV17490( X)02/95] 2. Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN.


*[FV17500( X)02/95] 4. Turn the ignition key from RUN to OFF.


164


*[FV17510( X)02/95] 6. Turn the ignition key back to RUN within 30 seconds ofstep 2.

*[FV17515( X)02/95] 7. The horn should chirp once. If not, wait 30 seconds andrepeat steps 1 through 6.

[FV17520( X)06/04] 8. Press the door power unlock button twice.

*[FV17525( X)02/95] 9. Press the door power lock button.

[FV17530( X)03/95] 10. The horn will chirp twice if the remote Memory Seat featurewas deactivated, three times (two short chirps followed by along chirp) if the remote Memory Seat feature was activated.

*[FV17535( X)02/95] 11. Turn the ignition OFF.

[FV17540( X)03/95] 12. The horn will chirp once to confirm that you activated ordeactivated the remote Memory Seat feature.

[FV17542( X)03/95] To reactivate the remote Memory Seat system, simply repeat theinstructions for deactivating the system. By reentering the codethat deactivates the remote Memory Seat, the keyless entrysystem reinstates the feature.

[FV17545( X)09/95] NOTE: The Memory Seat function will continue to work fromthe door switch even when deactivated at the remotekeyless entry module. Only remote Memory Seatrecall can be deactivated.

%*[FV17551(ALL)02/95] Replacing the batteries

*[FV17601(ALL)02/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin typethree-volt lithium 2016 batteries (included) that should last forseveral years of normal use. If you notice a significant decreasein operating range, the batteries should be replaced.Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies,watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.


Features

165

*[FV17701(ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system canalso be affected by weather conditions (such as verycold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle(buildings, other vehicles, radio and TV towers, etc.).Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 33feet (10 meters) away from your vehicle.

[FV17801(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021161-A

Opening the remote transmitter

*[FV17901(ALL)02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries bytwisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter.DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTERAPART. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place thepositive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves backtogether.

[FV18001(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021162-A

Replacing the batteries


166

%*[FV18101(ALL)02/95] Replacing lost transmitters

[FV18200(ALL)07/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, you should take your vehicle’stransmitters to your dealer to have the remote entry systemdeprogrammed for the lost transmitter. This is necessary toprevent further unauthorized use of the lost transmitter.

*[FV18301(ALL)02/95] You can also purchase additional transmitters (up to 4transmitters can be used) from your dealer. You will need totake all your transmitters to the dealer so they can programthem to the remote entry system all at the same time.

%*[FV18601(ALL)04/95] Illuminated Entry System (If equipped)

*[FV18701(ALL)06/95] This system will provide illumination of the vehicle’s interiorcourtesy lamps when either outside front door handle is pulledor when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door orsound the personal alarm. The system will automatically turnoff after approximately 25 seconds or when the ignition isturned to the RUN or ACC position.

*[FV18801(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The inside lights will not turn off if you have turnedthem on with the dimmer thumbwheel or if any dooris open.

[FV18810( X)10/94] Delayed Accessory[FV18815( X)08/94] This feature provides power to operate the power windows and

power moon roof for 10 minutes after the ignition switch isturned from the RUN to the OFF position.

[FV18820( X)06/94] If either front door is opened during the 10 minute period thedelayed accessory feature will be disabled.

%*[FV18900(ALL)08/94] Battery Saver

*[FV19000(ALL)03/95] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will turn off batteryvoltage to all of these lights after 40 minutes: glove box, enginecompartment, overhead console, mirror, courtesy andinterior (including cargo) lamps.


Features

167

[FV19100( X)03/95] This will prevent draining of the battery if these lights havebeen left on inadvertently or if a door or the liftgate is notcompletely closed. Battery voltage to these lamps will berestored when the remote entry transmitter is used, any door isopened, the liftgate is opened, or the ignition key is turned ONagain.

%*[FV19104(ALL)09/95] Anti-Theft Alarm System (If equipped)

*[FV19106(ALL)05/95] When armed, this system helps protect your vehicle againstbreak-ins or theft.

%*[FV19109(ALL)05/95] When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system triggers andwill:

*[FV19112( X)02/95] ■ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and theft indicator lamp

*[FV19115(ALL)06/95] ■ honk the horn

*[FV19118(ALL)05/95] ■ disable the starting circuit to prevent the vehicle from beingstarted

% [FV19121(ALL)02/95] Arming the System

*[FV19124(ALL)04/95] The system is ready to arm any time the ignition switch isturned OFF and the alarm is not triggered or sounding. Any ofthe following events will prearm the anti-theft system:

[FV19130(ALL)04/95] ■ Pressing the remote entry transmitter LOCK button to lockthe doors (with the doors open or closed),

[FV19133( X)04/95] ■ Pressing the 7/8 and 9/0 buttons on the keyless entrykeypad at the same time to lock the doors (with the doorsopen or closed), or

*[FV19136(ALL)04/95] ■ Opening a door and pressing the power door lock button tolock the doors.

*[FV19140( X)04/95] If a door, liftgate or liftgate window is open, the anti-theftsystem is prearmed and waiting for all doors to close. TheTHEFT indicator in the instrument panel will light continuouslywhile the system is prearmed.


168

[FV19145( X)04/95] ■ Close all doors, liftgate and liftgate window

*[FV19149( X)04/95] Once all doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed, if anywere open, the system will begin a 30 second countdown tobecome armed. The 30 second countdown allows people whomay still be in the vehicle time to exit without triggering thealarm. The THEFT indicator will glow steadily until the systemis armed. When the system is armed, the THEFT indicator willbegin to flash with short flashes every 2 seconds until thesystem is triggered or disarmed.

*[FV19153( X)02/95] Remember, all doors, the liftgate and liftgate window must befully closed for the anti-theft system to arm. If a door, theliftgate or liftgate window has been left open or ajar, and youpress the remote entry transmitter twice to confirm the doorsare locked, two short horn chirps will warn you that theanti-theft system is not arming.

*[FV19155(ALL)02/95] When you get a single horn chirp by pressing the LOCK buttontwice within 5 seconds on your remote entry transmitter, youcan be assured that all doors are locked and the anti-theftsystem is arming.

% [FV19157(ALL)02/95] Disarming the System

*[FV19160(ALL)10/95] An armed or activated system can be disarmed if you:

*[FV19162(ALL)04/95] ■ Unlock the doors by pressing the remote entry transmitterUNLOCK button.

*[FV19163( X)04/95] ■ Unlock the doors by entering the unlock code on the keylessentry keypad.

*[FV19187( X)02/95] ■ Unlock any door or the liftgate with a key.

*[FV19190(ALL)02/95] ■ Turn ignition to the ON or ACC position.

*[FV19196(ALL)04/95] ■ Pressing the remote entry PANIC button will disarm theanti-theft system only when the anti-theft alarm is triggeredand sounding.


Features

169

*[FV19200(ALL)02/95] When unlocking the vehicle with a key, turn the key all theway to the end of its travel or the system may not disarm.

*[FV19202(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The flashing lights and honking horn will shut offautomatically within 2 minutes 45 seconds after thesystem is triggered. It will trigger again if anotherintrusion occurs. However, the starter circuit remainsdisabled until the system is disarmed.

*[FV19205(ALL)05/95] The anti-theft system is designed to work with the factoryinstalled remote entry system. It may not work with otherremote entry systems.

[FV19210( X)06/94] Automatic Ride Control System(If equipped)

[FV19213( X)03/95] The automatic ride control system is designed to improve ride,handling, and general vehicle performance for both on andoff-road conditions by adjusting vehicle ride height and shockdampening (firm or soft).

[FV19216( X)08/94] The system automatically controls the vehicle ride height over arange of approximately two inches based on vehicle speed andselection of two or four wheel drive modes. Also, the systemkeeps the vehicle at a constant level if a load is added to orremoved from the vehicle.

[FV19218( X)03/95] The automatic ride control system places the vehicle at itslowest height when two wheel drive is selected. Shockdampening is automatically set based on driver and road inputsto optimize ride.

[FV19220( X)03/95] The automatic ride control system raises the vehicleapproximately one inch when Auto 4WD is selected. However,if vehicle speed exceeds 58 mph (93 km/h), the system willlower the vehicle to its two wheel drive height to maximize ridecomfort. The vehicle will raise again if vehicle speed is less than30 mph (48 km/h) for one minute. Like the two wheel drivemode, shock dampening is automatically set based on driverand road inputs.


170

[FV19224( X)03/95] In 4WD Low, the automatic ride control system raises thevehicle approximately two inches above its lowest height. Shockdampening is locked in firm mode. The height change improvesbody clearance. The combination of firm dampening and theheight change also provides maximum suspension feedback forimproved off-road safety and performance.

[FV19226( X)03/95] The vehicle will drop to its lowest position when the ignition isturned OFF to provide ease of entry and exit of the vehicle.

[FV19229( X)03/95] As a safety consideration, whenever a door is opened, includingthe liftgate and liftgate glass, the system memorizes andmaintains the height at the moment the door was opened. Thesystem will maintain this height until either the doors are allclosed or vehicle speed exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h).

[FV19234( X)03/95] An on-board air compressor and solenoids are used to raise andlower the vehicle. It is normal to occasionally hear a buzz orclicking from the vehicle even when the ignition is turned off.The system stays energized for forty minutes after ignition isturned off to compensate for any load changes made after thevehicle is parked.

[FV19237( X)05/95] The automatic ride control system operation can be monitoredthrough the message center. Refer to Message Center in theWarning Lights and Gauges chapter for more details.

[FV19240( X)08/94] Service Switch

[FV19243( X)08/94] The automatic ride control service switch is mounted in the jackstorage area. The switch should be turned off to disable theautomatic ride control system during jacking, hoisting, towing,or transport of the vehicle to avoid unexpected vehiclemovement.


Features

171

[FV19246( X)03/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021253-AAutomatic Ride Control service switch

%*[FV19250(ALL)02/95] Windows

*[FV19300(ALL)08/95] Operating the Windows Manually

*[FV19400(ALL)08/95] The door windows are opened and closed by turning the handlecrank.

[FV19600(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021163-A

Manual window operation


172

[FV20801( X)05/95] Flip quarter window (2 door model only)

[FV20900( X)03/91] To open, press outward on the window latches, then depressthe levers on each side of the latch and pull inward. Move thelatch out and into the open position. To close, depress the leverson each side of the latch. Lift the latch and pull inward, thenpress latch outward to lock the levers.

[FV21000( X)03/90]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020680-BFlip quarter window

%*[FV22901(ALL)03/91] Using the Power Windows (If equipped)

[FV23001(ALL)08/94] Each door has a power control that opens and closes thewindow on that door. The driver’s door has a master controlswitch that operates all door windows. You must place theignition switch in the ON or ACC position to use your powerwindow controls.

[FV23101( X)02/92] One touch down driver’s power window operation

[FV23201( X)01/95] The one touch down power window feature allows you tocompletely open the driver’s window without holding down thewindow switch. To open the window completely, press thewindow switch to the down position for less than 1/2 second,then release it. If the switch is pressed while the window isgoing down, the window will stop at that position.


Features

173

[FV23401( X)04/95] To close the window, hold the window switch to the upposition until the window closes.

*[FV23501(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the power windows. Theymay seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants areclear of the window(s) before closing.

[FV23701( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090162-AMaster control switch


174

%*[FV24101(ALL)01/95] Seats[FV24250( X)10/94] Four-Way Head Restraints (If equipped)

[FV24325(ALL)06/94] Adjust the head restraints so that the cushion contacts the backof your head when you move your head rearward.

[FV24350( X)10/94] The head restraint may be adjusted in four directions. To raiseor lower the head restraint, push in the lock release button. Thebutton is located on the outboard side of the post of the headrestraint for the driver’s side and the inboard side for thepassenger side. To adjust the head restraint forward orrearward, simply push or pull head restraint to desired position.

[FV24650( X)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021021-B

Adjusting the head restraint (limited)

%*[FV24801(ALL)05/90] Adjusting the Front Seat Manually

*[FV25920(ALL)06/95] To move the front seat forward or rearward:

[FV25930(ALL)08/94] 1. Find the adjustment bar at lower front of the front seat.

[FV25940(ALL)10/94] 2. Lift bar upward to unlatch the seat.

*[FV25950(ALL)08/95] 3. Move the seat to the desired position.

[FV25960(ALL)10/94] 4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its new position. Makesure the seat latches securely in place.


Features

175

[FV25970(ALL)10/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0021273-A Adjusting the bucket seat


Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when thevehicle is moving.


Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoidinjuring people in a collision or sudden stop.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, alwaysdrive and ride with your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.




176

[FV26400(ALL)08/94] Reclining Bucket Seats (If equipped)

*[FV27301( X)02/92] You can tilt the seat back of your bucket seats backward.

*[FV27401( X)03/93] 1. On the outboard side of the seat, lift the recliner handle upand hold it in place.

*[FV27501( X)10/89] 2. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust it to the positionyou want.

[FV27601( X)10/94] 3. Release the handle to latch the seat back in place.

*[FV27701( X)10/89] 4. To return the seat back upright, lift the handle and leanforward.

[FV27751(ALL)08/94] Lifting the recliner handle of an unoccupied seat will allow theseat back to fold forward for access to the rear. Pushing the seatback with the release handle raised returns the seat back to theupright position.

[FV27800(ALL)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021165-AReclining bucket seat


Features

177

[FV28100( X)10/89] Folding Rear Seat

[FV28201( X)11/89] 2 door models

[FV28301( X)10/89] To fold down the rear split seat:

[FV28401( X)05/95] Rotate the head restraint fully forward. Lower the head restraintto the top of the seatback. Pull upward on the latch releasehandle at the side of the seatback, while pulling the seatbackforward with the other hand. Push the seatback downward untilthe latch engages in the full down position.

[FV28601( X)05/95] To return the system to the seating position, pull upward on thelatch release handle while rotating the seat upward until seatback latches in the upright position.

[FV28701( X)11/89] The inboard safety belt buckle will not be damaged by thisoperation. The buckles will automatically return to originalposition when seat is upright.

[FV28801( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica art:0020226-F

Folding rear seat (two door model)

[FV28901( X)11/89] 4 door models

[FV28902( X)06/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a built-in child seat,the seatback cannot be folded down unless thebuilt-in child seat is fully stowed.


178

[FV29000( X)10/89] To fold down the rear split seat:

[FV29101( X)10/94] 1. Push the lower release handle (located on side of seat)downward to unlatch the seat back latch.

[FV29201( X)10/94] 2. Rotate the seat downward into the latched load floorposition.

[FV29251( X)09/95] NOTE: When you hear a “click” type sound, this ensures theseatback will be in the latched load floor position.

[FV29301( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica art:0020664-E

Folding rear seat (four door model)

[FV29401( X)08/94] To return the seat to the upright, locked seating position:

[FV29501( X)10/94] 1. Push downward on the upper outboard corner of theseatback and hold.

[FV29601( X)10/94] 2. Lift the lower release handle upward to unlatch the seatback latch.

[FV29701( X)10/94] 3. Rotate seat upward until seat back latches in the uprightposition.


Features

179

[FV29801( X)08/94] Reclining Rear Seat (If equipped)

[FV29811( X)08/94] To recline the rear seatback:

[FV29821( X)08/94] ■ Turn the recliner handle (upper handle) rearward whilepushing the seatback rearward.

[FV29826( X)10/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0021285-B

[FV29831( X)08/94] To return the seatback from the recline position:

[FV29841( X)08/94] ■ Turn the recliner handle (upper handle) rearward. Theseatback will automatically return to its upright position.


180

[FV46005(ALL)08/94] Tilt Slide Seat (If equipped)

[FV46015( X)03/93] 2 door models only

[FV46020(ALL)08/94] With the front seatback tilted forward, the tilt slide seat can bemoved to provide additional entry space to access the rear seatcompartment of the vehicle.

*[FV46025(ALL)05/94] To operate the tilt slide seat:

[FV46030(ALL)08/94] 1. Lift the seatback release lever on the outboard side of theseat cushion to unlock the slide mechanism and seatback.

*[FV46035(ALL)03/93] 2. Push the seat assembly forward to provide entry space to therear seat compartment of the vehicle.


Do not place objects behind or under the front seatwhich can prevent the seat from returning to the lockedposition.

[FV46040(ALL)08/94] 3. With the seatback still forward, using the seat cushion pushthe seat rearward to the desired position and return theseatback to its upright position. This will lock the seat track.

[FV46043(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Whenever the seatback is returned to the uprightposition, the seat will lock in that seat position.

*[FV46052(ALL)10/94] NOTE: The seat can no longer be moved rearward when inits latched position.


Features

181

[FV46055(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021166-ATilt slide seat

*[FV46065(ALL)05/95] Prior to operating the vehicle, check to ensure that the seatassembly is locked by pushing or pulling the seat forward orrearward. If seat does not lock, repeat steps 2 and 3.

[FV46070(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021167-BLocking tilt slide seat


182

*[FV46075(ALL)03/93] To operate the seat adjuster:

[FV46080(ALL)10/94] 4. To adjust the seats forward or rearward, locate the releasebar at the lower front area of the seat cushion. Lift therelease bar and hold until the desired seat position isobtained, then release the bar to relock the seat.

[FV46085(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021168-BAdjusting seat

[FV46100(ALL)02/91] 60/40 Split Front Bench (If equipped)

[FV46200( X)10/90] The seat back release operates the same as the basic bucket seat.On two door models both seats have the slide tilt feature.

[FV46500( X)08/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020637-C

60/40 split front bench


Features

183

%*[FV46600(ALL)05/95] Using the Power Seats (If equipped)

*[FV46700(ALL)08/94] If your vehicle has the power seat option, you can adjust it inseveral directions. The controls are on the outboard side of theseat.

[FV46800(ALL)08/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0020888-BThe power controls on the driver’s seat

[FV46910( X)03/93] Three Person Memory Seats — Explorer Limited Only

[FV46920( X)03/93] Your Explorer Limited has a three person memory driver seatwhich includes power tracks. The memory switch is located inthe driver door trim panel forward of the power mirror switch.

[FV46925( X)03/93] It is also equipped with power lumbar support, infinite positionseatback and four way head restraints.


184

[FV46926( X)04/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021022-BThe power controls on the driver’s seat

[FV46927( X)03/93] To adjust the infinite position seatback, pull up on the handlewhile leaning against the back of the seat. Release the handle tolock the seat in its new position. You can tilt the seat back orbring it forward.

[FV46929( X)08/94] Lifting the seatback adjustment lever of an unoccupied seat willallow the seatback to fold forward for access to the rear.Pushing the seatback backwards with the handle lifted returnsthe seat upright.

[FV46930( X)01/93] To use the memory switch:

[FV46940( X)03/94] 1. After the seat is in the desired position, depress the “SET”button, then press the “1” button within 5 seconds or untilthe light goes off.


Features

185

[FV46950( X)03/94] 2. For an alternative memory position, place seat in the seconddesired position, depress the “SET” button, then press the“2” button within 5 seconds or until the light goes off.

[FV46960( X)03/94] 3. For the third memory position, move the seat to the desiredposition, depress the “SET” button, then press the “1” and“2” buttons at the same time within 5 seconds or until thelight goes off.

[FV46970( X)03/94] To use your memory switch either in Park or Neutral after thesettings are complete, press either the “1”, “2”, or “1 and 2simultaneously” and the seat will move to that position.

[FV47000(ALL)08/94] Using the Power Lumbar Support and Side Bolsters(If equipped)

[FV47200(ALL)08/94] Inflating the lumbar support and side bolsters

[FV47800(ALL)12/91] If your vehicle is equipped with this option you caninflate/deflate the lumbar support pad in the seat back andinflate/deflate the side bolster pads.

[FV47900(ALL)10/94] To inflate the bolster pads, push the “+” end of the front rockerswitch. To deflate the bolster pads, push the “s” end of theswitch.

[FV48000(ALL)10/94] To inflate the lumbar support pad, push the “+” end of the rearrocker switch. To deflate the lumbar support pad, push the “s”end of the switch.


186

[FV48300(ALL)08/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021169-CPower lumbar and side bolsters switch — sport bucket seat

%*[FV48310(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

%*[FV48315(ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV48320(ALL)05/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuumcleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directionsthat come with the cleaner.

*[FV48325(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hiddenarea of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture isadversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not useit.

[FV48340(ALL)02/96] Cleaning your vehicle

[FV48345(ALL)02/96] Leather

[FV48350(ALL)12/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth.For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather andvinyl cleaner or a mild soap.


Features

187

[FV48400( X)06/94] Positive Location Floor Mats (If equipped)[FV48500( X)05/95] Installation

[FV48600( X)03/93] 1. Move driver’s seat to most rearward position.

[FV48700( X)12/92] 2. Locate driver’s side floor mat in vehicle with rear of matagainst left (outboard) front edge of seat track mountingbracket (see Figure 1).

[FV48800( X)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020972-B

[FV48900( X)12/92] 3. Use a screwdriver to screw locator post into vehiclecarpeting. Exert pressure while turning to allow locator"auger point" to pierce floor carpet. Locator will not screwdown tightly, but will rotate freely when installed properly.

[FV49000( X)12/92] Usage

[FV49100( X)12/92] 4. To remove mat, pull up on rear of mat to un-snap fromlocator post (see Figure 2).

[FV49200( X)12/92] 5. To re-install mat, align grommet in mat over locator postand push down to snap mat in place (see Figure 2).


188

[FV49300( X)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020973-B

%*[FV50000(ALL)01/95] Mirrors%*[FV50700( X)01/95] Automatic Dimming Inside Rearview Mirror

(If equipped)

[FV51600( X)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020976-CThe automatic non-glare mirror

*[FV51700( X)01/95] The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normalstate to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach themirror. This mirror functions at night, and has a limitedfunction at dusk or dawn. From the non-glare state, the mirrorwill return to the normal state after a short delay. The delaystarts when the glare goes away. The delay prevents excessivechanging of the mirror as traffic moves behind and around thevehicle, or on rolling hills and curves.


Features

189

*[FV51800( X)01/95] The electronic mirror measures the brightness of the lightcoming in from the rear of the vehicle. It automatically makes acorrection in the glare state. The mirror may be turned off ineither the normal or non-glare position.

*[FV51900( X)06/94] There are two light sensors (photocells) in this mirror. Thesensor that detects rear glare is located inside a window in theupper RH corner of the mirror. The second light sensor whichdetermines outside light level is located on the backside of themirror case.

*[FV52000( X)01/95] One important safety feature is that the mirror automaticallyreturns to the normal position whenever the vehicle is placed inR (Reverse) (when the mirror is in the ON position). Thisfeature ensures a bright clear view in the mirror when backingup.

*[FV52200( X)03/95] To turn on the automatic mirror, have the key in the ONposition and push the ON button once. The light in the centerof the button will light indicating the mirror is on. To turn themirror off push the ON button again.

*[FV52300( X)05/93] The mirror can be temporarily darkened, if wanted, by pushingthe Dim button. After releasing the button, the mirror willreturn to the previous operation mode after a short delay.


190

%*[FV52400( X)06/95] Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If equipped)

%*[FV52500( X)06/95] Your vehicle may feature illuminated vanity mirrors on the sunvisors. You can turn on the lighted mirror by lifting the mirrordoor cover.

[FV52600( X)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021171-B

Visor vanity mirror

*[FV52700( X)05/93] Visors that are equipped with the lighted vanity mirror alsohave an auxiliary visor. The auxiliary visor slides right and leftto cover the windshield when the primary visor is pivoted tothe door window.

[FV52800( X)03/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090129-AAuxiliary sun visor (right side shown)


Features

191

%*[FV54500(ALL)08/91] Dual Electric Remote Control Mirrors (If equipped)

*[FV54600(ALL)08/91] To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors:

*[FV54800(ALL)01/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door panel.

[FV55000(ALL)10/94] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the selector switchto the right or left.

*[FV55200(ALL)01/89] 3. Move the control knob in the direction you want to movethe mirror.

*[FV55400(ALL)06/94] 4. Return the selector switch to the middle position to keep themirror in place.

[FV55500(ALL)04/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090159-A

Power mirror control

*[FV55900(ALL)12/91] Do not clean the plastic housing of any electric mirror withgasoline or other petroleum-based cleaning products.


The side view mirror on the right makes objects appearsmaller and farther away than they actually are.

[FV56000( X)03/93] Heated Mirror Feature (Limited)

*[FV56100( X)03/95] Both mirrors are heated whenever the Electric Rear WindowDefroster is turned on. Do not remove ice from the mirrors witha scraper or you could damage them. If the outside mirror glassis frozen in place, do not attempt to readjust or move themirror glass or damage may result.


192

[FV56200( X)10/94] Rear Storage Compartment with Net(If equipped)

[FV56300( X)12/91] Your vehicle may have a small storage compartment which islocated on the inside rear passenger quarter panel. Thiscompartment has a net which will secure small objects.

[FV56400( X)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020564-B

Rear storage compartment with net

%*[FV56550( X)02/95] Moon Roof (If equipped)

*[FV56650( X)03/95] You can move the moon roof back to open the glass panel, oryou can tilt it up to ventilate the vehicle.

[FV56750( X)06/94] The roof console switch is used to open and close the moonroof. Press and hold the switch until the desired position isreached. At the fully closed position the motor automaticallyturns off.

*[FV56850( X)01/95] To open the moon roof, press and hold the rear portion of theswitch.

*[FV56950( X)01/95] To close the moon roof, press and hold the front portion of theswitch.

[FV57050( X)06/94] To tilt the moon roof into vent position when glass is closed,press and hold the front portion of the switch.

[FV57150( X)06/94] To close from the vent position, press and hold the rear portionof the switch.


Features

193

*[FV57350( X)01/95] The moon roof has a sliding shade that you can manually openor close to block the sun when the glass panel is shut.

*[FV57450( X)06/94] To close the sliding shade, pull the shade toward the front ofthe vehicle. The shade automatically opens when the moon roofis opened.

[FV57550( X)06/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021251-AMoon roof switch


194

[FV59400(ALL)08/94] Console (If equipped)

*[FV59500(ALL)12/91] Your vehicle may have a full console. The full console has thefeatures shown in the illustration below.

[FV59600( X)08/94] NOTE: Ford recommends the use of 12 oz. (355 ml.) beveragecans in the cupholder. With manual transmissions there may bean interference of the shift lever, when in reverse, with tallerbeverage cans.

[FV59700(ALL)07/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090211-AThe features on the console — bucket seats


Features

195

[FV59800(ALL)04/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0020896-CStorage armrest — 60/40 split bench


196

[FV59900( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090166-AHigh series console

[FV59930( X)10/94] Replacing the Tissue Box

[FV59940( X)10/94] 1. Slide coinholder/tissue tray out of the console in an upwardmotion.

[FV59950( X)10/94] 2. Replace tissue box.

[FV59960( X)10/94] 3. Slide coinholder/tissue tray into console locating pins atbottom of tray. Fit in slots in console bracket.


Features

197

[FV60300( X)03/93] Overhead Console (If equipped)[FV60400( X)05/95] Your Explorer comes with an overhead console located between

the sun visors. The console includes:

*[FV60500( X)03/93] ■ Compass/temperature display

*[FV60600( X)03/93] ■ Map lamps

*[FV60700( X)03/93] ■ Storage compartment

%*[FV60800( X)03/93] Compass/Temperature display

*[FV60900( X)05/95] This display provides the outside temperature and the compassdirection of the vehicle.

*[FV60920( X)03/93] The MODE button is used to select one of the followingfeatures:

*[FV60940( X)03/93] ■ Display Off

*[FV60960( X)03/93] ■ Temp in ˚F and Compass

*[FV60980( X)03/93] ■ Temp in ˚C and Compass

[FV61001( X)07/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090165-A

The electric compass

[FV61100( X)10/94] Outside temperature display

*[FV61150( X)05/95] If the outside temperature is below 39˚F (4˚C), the word “ICE”will flash in the display alternately with the outside temperaturefor about one minute.


198

[FV61200( X)10/94] Electronic compass

[FV61500( X)10/94] Factors affecting compass accuracy

*[FV61600( X)01/95] The compass reading can be affected when you drive near anumber of things — such as large buildings, bridges, powerlines, and powerful antennas.

*[FV61700( X)05/95] Your compass can also be affected by magnetic or metallicobjects placed in or on the vehicle. If the compass is givinginaccurate readings, perform the following compass adjustments.

[FV61800( X)10/94] Compass adjustments

*[FV61900( X)05/95] There are two possible adjustments to the compass: Zone andCalibration.

[FV62050( X)05/95] Zone adjustment:

*[FV62100( X)03/93] 1. Determine which zone of the country you are in by referringto the following zone map.


Features

199

[FV62200( X)04/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021177-AZone map

*[FV62300( X)03/93] 2. Press and hold the “MODE” button until the “VAR”indicator appears in the display (approximately 4 seconds).

*[FV62400( X)03/93] 3. Release the “MODE” button. The display will now show thecurrent zone number that is stored in the compass.

*[FV62500( X)03/93] 4. Press the “MODE” button repeatedly (or press and hold in)until the desired zone number appears in the display (once itreaches 15, the next press of the button will set it to 1).

*[FV62600( X)03/93] 5. Release the “MODE” button when the desired zone numberis displayed.

*[FV62700( X)05/95] After approximately three seconds the display will flash allsegments and then return to normal operation. Zone is nowupdated.


200

[FV62850( X)05/95] Calibration adjustment:

*[FV62900( X)03/93] 1. Find an open area that is free from steel structures and highvoltage lines. An open parking lot is a good example.

*[FV63000( X)03/93] 2. Press and hold the “MODE” button until the “CAL”indicator appears in the display (approximately 8 seconds).

*[FV63050( X)05/95] NOTE: You cannot perform calibration unless the displayreads “CAL.”

*[FV63100( X)03/93] 3. Release the “MODE” button.

*[FV63300( X)03/93] 4. Once the “CAL” indicator has appeared, drive the vehicleslowly (less than 3 mph / 5 km/h) in 360˚ circles until the“CAL” indicator turns off. This will happen within 2 to 3complete circles.

%*[FV63800( X)03/93] Map lamps

*[FV63900( X)03/93] The map lamps are located in the overhead console. The driverand passenger side each has its own switch.

[FV64000( X)09/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020975-BMap lamps (If equipped)


Features

201

%*[FV64100( X)09/95] Storage Compartment (If equipped)

*[FV64200( X)03/93] The storage compartment can be accessed by pushing the“OPEN” button. The door will open approximately one inchthen it can be manually moved to the full open position.

*[FV64300( X)03/93] The compartment can be used to store a variety of items suchas: tissues, parking pass, cigarettes or sunglasses.

*[FV64400( X)03/93] Use as Garage Door Opener

*[FV64500( X)03/93] The door can be converted from “Utility” storage to a housingand means of actuating a variety of “aftermarket” garage dooropener transmitters.

*[FV64600( X)03/93] Removal of storage clip

*[FV64700( X)03/93] In order to convert the door, simply remove the utility storageclip from the back side of the door as shown in the followingillustration.

[FV64800( X)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020981-B


202

*[FV64900( X)03/93] Installing “aftermarket” transmitter

*[FV65000( X)03/93] Place the piece of Velcro hook onto your aftermarkettransmitter, opposite side as that of the actuator button.

*[FV65100( X)03/93] Place the transmitter into the console housing, button down, asshown. Place the height adapters provided into the back side ofthe “GARAGE” button as needed. Some larger transmitters willnot need the adapters, and some smaller ones may need twoadapters.

*[FV65200( X)03/93] The transmitter can now be activated without opening the door.Simply depress the “GARAGE” button.

[FV65300( X)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020982-B


Features

203

[FV65400( X)03/95] Rear Console (If equipped)[FV65500( X)03/95] Your Explorer comes with a rear console that is located between

the bucket seats. The console includes:

[FV65600( X)08/94] ■ Air vents, with rear seat controls

[FV65700( X)08/94] ■ Radio controls

[FV65800( X)10/94] ■ Beverage holder

[FV65900( X)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090192-ARear console


204

%*[FV69900(ALL)03/95] Power Point Electrical Outlet[FV70000(ALL)08/94] The power point outlet should be used in place of the cigarette

lighter for optional electrical accessories.

[FV70100(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into thecigarette lighter. Use the power point.

[FV70200(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020260-E

Power point electrical outlet

[FV70300( X)10/94]

13-1/2 pica

art:0021275-B Power point electrical outlet (high series console)


Features

205

[FV72500( X)08/94] Luggage Rack (If equipped)[FV72600( X)12/92] Loading the Luggage Rack

[FV72700( X)10/94] If your vehicle is equipped with the luggage rack, load yourluggage as far back as it will safely go on the rack. Do notcarry more than 100 pounds (45 kg) or cause the vehicle toexceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or its gross axleweight rating (GAWR front and rear), which are shown on theSafety Compliance Certification Label.

[FV72800( X)2/96]

10-1/2 p art:0020644-G

Luggage rack

[FV72900( X)07/92] Luggage Rack Adjustment

[FV73000( X)08/94] The rear crossbar of the luggage rack can be adjusted towardthe front or rear of your vehicle. To unlock the crossbar, slidethe locking switches at each end of the rear crossbar toward therear of the vehicle until the word “UNLOCKED” appears. Thecrossbar is now free to slide forward or backward in the guiderails.

[FV73100( X)10/94] Adjust the crossbar to the desired position and lock into placeby pushing the locking switches on each end of the crossbartoward the front of the vehicle.


206

[FV73200( X)12/92] The rear rack can be completely removed in the “UNLOCKED”position by sliding the crossbar toward the rear of the vehicleuntil it becomes free of the guide rails.

[FV73300( X)12/92] “D” Ring Adjustment

[FV73400( X)12/95] The luggage rack has two “D” rings (one on each side of theluggage rack guide rails) that can be adjusted to secure cargo.Turn the “D” rings counterclockwise to loosen. Move the “D”rings to the desired positions and lock into place by turning the“D” ring clockwise. The “D” rings should only be tightened byhand.

[FV73500( X)06/94] Items should be properly secured to the luggage rack to preventthem from coming loose and creating a safety hazard on theroadway.


207

Electronic

Sound

System

s

[AS

00

50

0(

X)0

3/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:0060679-A

Luxury

Audio

System

File:09unasx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996

208

[AS

00

55

0(

X)0

3/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:0060680-A

Luxury

Audio

Systemw

ithC

DD

J

File:09unasx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996

Electronic Sound Systems

209

%*[AS00600( X)06/95] Luxury Audio System

*[AS00700( X)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS00800( X)08/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS00900( X)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the radio on. Pressagain to turn it off.

*[AS01000( X)08/95] How to adjust the volume

[AS01100( X)06/95] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob clockwise to increase thevolume and counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

[AS01200( X)09/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listeninglevel when the ignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, the volume willcome back to a “nominal” listening level. However, ifthe radio power is turned off (with the “VOL/PUSHON” button) and the volume is at a low level, thevolume will remain in the position it was set at whenradio power is switched back on.

*[AS01300( X)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS01400( X)04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.Pushing the “AM/FM” button causes the frequency band toswitch from “AM” to “FM1” to “FM2” to “AM”, changing oneband to the next each time the button is pressed. Thesefunctions are used with the station memory buttons describedunder How to tune radio stations.

File:09unasx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996

210

%*[AS01500( X)08/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS01600( X)01/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. Youcan use the “TUNE”, “SEEK”, “SCAN” or memory buttons.

*[AS01700( X)09/95] ■ Using the “TUNE” function

*[AS01800( X)01/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time by pressing and releasing either the left (b) or right(a) side of the “TUNE” or “TUNE DISCS” button. Tochange frequencies quickly, press and hold down either theright or left side of the button.

*[AS01900( X)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcastfrequency, whether or not a station is present on thatfrequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)

*[AS02000( X)08/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS02100( X)05/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select thenext listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left(b) side of the button to select the next listenable stationdown the frequency band. By holding the button down,listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desiredstation.

*[AS02200( X)01/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS02300( X)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on each listenable station forapproximately five seconds.

*[AS02400( X)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station,press the “SCAN” button again.

*[AS02500( X)01/95] ■ Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons

*[AS02600( X)01/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AMstations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2)



211

*[AS02700( X)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS02800( X)01/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold until the soundreturns and the lamp above the memory button lights up.That memory button is now set.

*[AS02900( X)01/95] 3. Follow the above steps for each memory preset button.

*[AS03000( X)01/95] Using the Automatic Memory Store feature(“AUTOSET”)

*[AS03100( X)01/95] If the memory buttons have been set, either by using the AutoMemory Load feature or if you have set them manually, thesystem is prepared to let you use a convenient feature calledAutomatic Memory Store.

*[AS03200( X)01/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strongstations into your memory buttons without losing youroriginally set stations. Your radio will automatically set yourmemory buttons to the strong local stations.

*[AS03300( X)01/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTOSET”button once. Your radio will set the first six strong stations ofthe band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memorybuttons. The display will flash “AUTO” and display the autoseticon “A” while the stations are being set in the memorybuttons.

*[AS03400( X)07/95] NOTE: If there are less than six strong stations in thefrequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons willstore the last strong station detected on the band.After all stations have been filled, the radio will beginplaying the station stored on memory button 1.

*[AS03500( X)01/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to themanually-set memory button stations, simply push the“AUTOSET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”.The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band, theradio will store the next set of six strong stations.


212

*[AS03600( X)01/95] Adjusting the tone balance of your radio

*[AS03700( X)01/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing bass and treble response

*[AS03800( X)01/95] Push the “BASS/TREB” popout knob to gain access to thebass and treble controls. Bass control allows you to adjustthe lower, bass frequencies to your preference. The outerring of the “BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the bass (turnclockwise to increase bass; counterclockwise to decreasebass).

*[AS03900( X)01/95] Treble control allows you to adjust the higher, treblefrequencies of your radio to your preference. The inner ringof the “BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the treble (turn clockwiseto increase treble; counterclockwise to decrease treble).

*[AS04000( X)01/95] ■ Adjusting speaker balance and speaker fader

*[AS04100( X)01/95] Push the “BAL/FADE” popout knob to gain access to thespeaker balance and fader controls. Balance control allowsyou to adjust the sound distribution between the right andleft speakers. The outer ring of “BAL/FADE” knob adjuststhe speaker balance control. (Turn clockwise to shift thesound to the right speakers, and turn counterclockwise toshift the sound to the left speakers.)

*[AS04200( X)01/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. The inner ring of the“BAL/FADE” knob adjusts the speaker fader. (Turnclockwise to shift the sound to the rear speakers, and turncounterclockwise to shift the sound to the front speakers.)



213

*[AS04210( X)07/94] Using the Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Feature

*[AS04220( X)01/96] Push the “DSP” button to activate the feature. The display willindicate which signal mode is in effect. To change the signalmode press either the left (b) or right (a) side of the selectorbutton (located under the “DSP” button).

*[AS04230( X)07/94] The following signal modes may be selected:

*[AS04240( X)07/94] 1. “HALL” — Rectangular concert hall capacity of about 2,000.

*[AS04250( X)07/94] 2. “CHURCH” — Church with a high vault.

*[AS04260( X)07/94] 3. “JAZZ” — Jazz club with clearly reflected sounds.

*[AS04270( X)07/94] 4. “STADIUM” — Outdoor stadium with a capacity of about30,000.

*[AS04280( X)07/94] 5. “NEWS” — “Voice-only” type of sound with a limited audioband.

*[AS04290( X)07/94] To deactivate the DSP feature, press the “DSP” button again.

%*[AS04300( X)05/92] Radio Antenna

[AS04350( X)10/94] The radio antenna is mounted on the front passenger sidequarter panel of the vehicle. It is a fixed mast antenna and cannot be retracted.

*[AS04400( X)04/95] Power Antenna (If equipped)

[AS04450( X)10/94] If your vehicle is equipped with a power antenna, it willautomatically be extended when the radio is turned on. Whenthe radio is turned off, it will automatically be retracted.

*[AS04500( X)09/95] NOTE: The radio must be turned off so that the antenna willretract prior to entering a car wash. Failure to retractthe antenna could result in damage to the antenna,antenna base, or vehicle.


214

%*[AS04600( X)08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player

*[AS04700( X)08/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tapeplayer.

*[AS04800( X)08/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS04900( X)04/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Onceyou insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to theright), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of theway in and play will begin after a momentary tape tighteningprocess. Display indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing.

*[AS05000( X)01/95] If the player is in the tape mode but not in play, pressing the“TAPE” button will activate play. If the “TAPE” button ispressed with no tape inserted, the display will flash “NOTAPE”.

*[AS05100( X)08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS05200( X)01/95] There are six ways to quickly locate a desired selection on thetape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, Blank Skip, “SEEK”,“SCAN” or “SIDE 1-2” functions. Following are briefdescriptions of each:

*[AS05300( X)09/95] ■ Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS05400( X)03/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radiowill play while the tape is in fast forward. The light abovethe “FF” button will blink while in the fast forward mode.Press “FF” again or press the “TAPE” button to stop fastforwarding. At the end of the tape, the directionautomatically reverses and plays the other side of the tape.

*[AS05500( X)08/95] ■ Rewinding the tape

*[AS05600( X)03/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The radio willautomatically begin playing while the tape is rewinding. Thelight above the “REW” button will blink while in the rewindmode. Press “REW” again or press the “TAPE” button tostop rewinding.



215

*[AS05700( X)08/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette tape player

*[AS05800( X)05/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a) side of the“SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on thetape. Push the left (b) side to restart a currently playingtape selection.

*[AS05900( X)01/95] ■ Using the “Blank Skip” function with your cassette tapeplayer

*[AS06000( X)01/95] Press the “Blank Skip” button to activate the blank skipmode. After approximately 20 seconds of blank program, thetape will seek forward to the next program.

*[AS06100( X)08/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player

*[AS06200( X)01/95] Pushing the “SCAN” button will begin the forward scanmode on the tape currently playing, stopping on each tapeselection for approximately eight seconds.

*[AS06300( X)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tapeselection, press the “SCAN” button or the “TAPE” button.

*[AS06400( X)08/95] ■ How to change the side of the tape being played

*[AS06500( X)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected by pressing the“SIDE 1-2” button.

*[AS06600( X)08/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS06700( X)03/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJECT”button. The tape will eject only when in the tape mode. Thecassette cannot be ejected when the radio is playing an “AM”or “FM” station. The system will revert to radio mode whenthe cassette is ejected.


216

*[AS06800( X)01/95] How to store the tape

*[AS06900( X)01/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resumeradio play.

*[AS07000( X)08/95] Using the Dolby� B noise reduction feature

*[AS07100( X)09/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.

[AS07200( X)07/95] Push the k button to activate. When activated, the lightabove the k button illuminates.

*[AS07300( X)08/95] Tape error messages

*[AS07400( X)08/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped to diagnose certainproblems you may experience. Error codes are as follows:

*[AS07500( X)01/95] TD E1 — Radio tries to change sides of tape 3 times in a 10second span. Push “EJECT” and try another tape. If problempersists, refer problem to qualified personnel for service.

*[AS07600( X)01/95] TD E2 — Tape eject failure. Radio tries to eject tape and it willnot eject. Push “EJECT” to eject tape. If the tape will not eject,refer problem to qualified personnel for service.

*[AS07700( X)01/95] TD E3 — Loading error. Push “EJECT” to eject tape. Reloadtape. If the same error code appears in the display, try anothertape.

[AS07705( X)09/94] Rear Seat Radio Controls (If equipped)

[AS07710( X)09/94] Rear seat radio controls are available on vehicles equipped withPremium and Luxury Audio Systems only.

[AS07715( X)09/94] The rear seat radio controls are located on the rear of the centerconsole. These controls duplicate several radio functions of theradio and allow the use of headphones in the vehicle.



217

[AS07720( X)09/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0060683-ARear Seat Radio Controls

*[AS07725( X)06/95] How to turn the rear seat radio controls on and off

[AS07727( X)09/94] Press memory preset buttons “3” and “5” simultaneously on theface of your radio to turn the rear seat radio controls on. Aheadphone symbol (j) will appear in the display when therear seat controls are on. Press “3” and “5” simultaneouslyagain to turn rear seat controls off.

*[AS07730( X)08/95] How to adjust the volume

[AS07735( X)09/94] Press the right (a) side of the “VOLUME” rocker switch toincrease volume, and push the left (b) side to decrease thevolume of the rear speakers.

[AS07740( X)09/95] NOTE: Rear seat volume control can be set no higher thancurrent radio setting unless speakers are turned off.See note under How to turn speakers on and off.

*[AS07745( X)06/95] Setting the AM or FM frequency band

[AS07750( X)09/94] Push the “AM/FM” button to change the frequency band.


218

*[AS07755( X)06/95] Using the “MEMORY” button

[AS07760( X)04/95] Push the “MEMORY” button to access the station you have setinto memory button 1 on the face of the radio. Successivelypushing this button will access, numerically, all stations set intothe Station Memory Preset buttons (1 through 6).

*[AS07765( X)06/95] How to turn the speakers on and off

*[AS07770( X)06/95] When the rear seat controls are on, push the “SPKRS ON-OFF”button to turn all speakers off. Push again to turn all speakerson.

*[AS07775( X)06/95] Using the “SEEK” function

[AS07785( X)06/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” rocker switch to seek tothe next highest radio station. Press the left (b) side to seek tothe next lower radio station.

[AS07790( X)09/95] NOTE: When using the rear seat controls, the “SEEK”function on the rear seat controls will also functionwith cassettes or CD, seeking the next (“SEEK a”) orprevious (“b SEEK”) selection.

*[AS07793( X)06/95] Using headphones with the rear seat controls

[AS07796( X)10/94] Two 3.5mm headphone jacks have been provided on the rearseat controls. Plug headphones (not provided) into the providedjack(s) to operate headphones.

*[AS07800( X)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes

*[AS07900( X)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way itwas meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:

*[AS08000( X)08/95] ■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tapeplayer head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain thebest playback sound and proper tape operation.

*[AS08100( X)08/95] ■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should beused. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subjectto breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.



219

*[AS08200( X)08/95] ■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, highhumidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed toextreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS08300( X)08/95] ■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playingby putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes andturning the hub until the tape is tight.

*[AS08400( X)08/95] ■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in themechanism. Remove any loose label material before insertinga cassette.

*[AS08500( X)08/95] ■ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player when not inuse. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.

%*[AS08600( X)08/95] Clock Operation

*[AS08700( X)08/95] How to view the clock mode

[AS08800( X)09/94] Press the “CLK” button to display time. The time will continueto be displayed until a radio or tape function is chosen. Afterapproximately 10 seconds, the time will again appear in thedisplay. To display radio or tape information only, press the“CLK” button a second time.

[AS08900( X)09/95] NOTE: The clock can be displayed or set whether the ignitionis on or off as long as the “CLK” button is depressed.

*[AS09000( X)08/95] How to set the clock

*[AS09100( X)08/95] 1. Turn the radio on.

[AS09200( X)04/00] 2. Press and hold the “CLK” button, press the right (a) side ofthe “SEEK” button to increase hours. Press the left (b) sideof the button to decrease hours. Press the right (a) side ofthe “TUNE” or “TUNE DISCS” button to increase minutes.Press the left (b) side of the button to decrease minutes.

*[AS09300( X)09/95] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PMindications.


220

[AS

29210(A

LL)05/9

5]

33-1

/2pica

art:0060681-A

Prem

iumStereo

Cassette

File:09unasx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996

Electronic

Sound

System

s221

[AS

29215(A

LL)09/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:0060682-A

Prem

iumStereo

Cassette

with

CD

DJ

File:09unasx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996

222

%*[AS29217(ALL)08/94] Premium Stereo Cassette and StereoCassette with CD DJ

*[AS29220(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS29225(ALL)08/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS29230(ALL)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH” knob to turn the radio on. Press againto turn it off.

*[AS29235(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume

[AS29240(ALL)06/95] Turn the “VOL/PUSH” knob clockwise to increase the volumeand counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Bars illuminate inthe display to show relative volume level.

*[AS29245(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listeninglevel when the ignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, the volume willcome back to a “nominal” listening level. However, ifthe radio power is turned off, the volume will remainin the position it was set at when radio power wasswitched off.

*[AS29250(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS29255(ALL)02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency bandor to stop/store cassette tape (when in cassette mode). Pushingthe button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 andFM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttonsdescribed under How to tune radio stations.



223

%*[AS29260(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations

[AS29265(ALL)10/94] There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. Youcan use the “TUNE”, “SEEK”, “SCAN” or the memory buttons.

*[AS29270(ALL)09/95] ■ Using the “TUNE” function

[AS29275(ALL)03/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time by pressing and releasing either the left (b) or right(a) side of the “TUNE” button. To change frequenciesquickly, press and hold down either the right or left side ofthe button.

*[AS29280(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcastfrequency, whether or not a station is present on thatfrequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)

*[AS29285(ALL)08/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function

[AS29290(ALL)09/94] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press theright (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b)side of the button to select the next listenable station downthe frequency band. By pressing and holding the button,listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desiredstation.

*[AS29295(ALL)01/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS29305(ALL)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on each listenable station forapproximately five seconds.

*[AS29310(ALL)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station,press the “SCAN” button again.


224

*[AS29315(ALL)01/95] ■ Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons

*[AS29320(ALL)01/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AMstations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2)

*[AS29325(ALL)08/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desiredfrequencies:

*[AS29330(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS29340(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the buttonuntil the sound returns. That station is now held in memoryon that button.

*[AS29345(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory presetbutton you want to set.

*[AS29350(ALL)01/95] ■ Using the AUTOSET feature

*[AS29355(ALL)01/95] With AUTOSET, you can continually set strong stations intoyour memory buttons without losing your originally setstations.

*[AS29360(ALL)01/95] Press the “AUTOSET” button once. Your radio will set thefirst six strong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1, orFM2) into the memory buttons. The display will show“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies setting thememory buttons.

*[AS29365(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in thefrequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons willstore the last strong station detected on the band.

*[AS29370(ALL)01/95] When all stations are filled, the radio will begin playing thestation stored in memory button 1.

*[AS29375(ALL)01/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return tomanually-set memory button stations, press the “AUTOSET”button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”.



225

*[AS29380(ALL)01/95] Adjusting the tone balance of your radio

*[AS29385(ALL)08/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS29390(ALL)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “BASS” button to increase bass;press the bottom (d) of the “BASS” button to decrease bass.

*[AS29395(ALL)08/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS29405(ALL)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “TREBLE” button to increase treble;press the bottom (d) of the treble button to decrease treble.

*[AS29410(ALL)08/95] ■ Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS29415(ALL)03/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the right and left speakers. Press the top (c) of the“BAL” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, andpress the bottom (d) of the “BAL” button to shift the soundto the left speakers.

*[AS29420(ALL)08/95] ■ Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS29425(ALL)03/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. Press the top (c) ofthe “FADE” button to shift the sound to the front speakers,and press the bottom (d) of the “FADE” button to shift thesound to the back speakers.

*[AS29430(ALL)06/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels ofbass and treble, and positions of speaker balance andfader functions (left to right, front to rear).


226

%*[AS29435(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player

*[AS29440(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tapeplayer.

*[AS29445(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS29450(ALL)04/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Onceyou insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to theright), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of theway in and play will begin after a momentary tape tighteningprocess. Display indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing.

*[AS29455(ALL)06/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition onwhether or not the radio power is on. However, withradio power off, the cassette tape is loaded and stored.

*[AS29465(ALL)08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS29470(ALL)08/95] There are four ways to quickly locate a desired selection on thetape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN”function. Following are brief descriptions of each.

*[AS29475(ALL)09/95] ■ Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS29480(ALL)01/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radiowill begin playing until fast forward is manually stopped (bypushing the “TAPE” button) or the end of the tape isreached.

*[AS29485(ALL)01/95] At the end of the tape, the direction automatically reversesand plays the other side of the tape.

*[AS29490(ALL)08/95] ■ Rewinding the tape

*[AS29495(ALL)01/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The radio willbegin playing until rewind is manually stopped (by pushingthe “TAPE” button) or the beginning of the tape is reached.



227

*[AS29505(ALL)08/95] ■ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette tape player

*[AS29510(ALL)08/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a) side of the“SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on thetape. Push the left (b) side to seek the previous tapeselection.

*[AS29515(ALL)08/95] ■ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player

*[AS29520(ALL)01/95] Press the “SCAN” button to begin the forward scan mode onthe tape currently playing, stopping on each tape selectionfor approximately an eight-second sampling (displayindicates “SC”).

*[AS29525(ALL)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tapeselection, press “SCAN” a second time.

*[AS29530(ALL)08/95] ■ How to change the side of the tape being played

*[AS29535(ALL)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected by pressing the“SIDE 1-2” button.

*[AS29540(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS29545(ALL)01/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJ” button.The radio will resume playing if the radio power is on. Thetape cartridge can be ejected with radio power (and/or ignition)on or off.


228

[AS29550(ALL)06/95] How to switch from tape to AM/FM mode

*[AS29555(ALL)01/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resumeradio play.

*[AS29560(ALL)08/95] Using the Dolby� B noise reduction feature

*[AS29565(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.

*[AS29570(ALL)04/95] Push the k button to activate Dolby B Noise Reduction. Pushagain to deactivate.

[AS29620( X)10/94] Two mini 3.5mm (1/8") jack headphone sets may be used withthe headphone jacks on your Rear Seat Radio Controls. Fordapproved headphones are also available for purchase by calling1-800-231-4429.

*[AS29650(ALL)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes

*[AS29655(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way itwas meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:

*[AS29660(ALL)08/95] ■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tapeplayer head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain thebest playback sound and proper tape operation.

*[AS29665(ALL)08/95] ■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should beused. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subjectto breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS29670(ALL)08/95] ■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, highhumidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed toextreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS29675(ALL)08/95] ■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playingby putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes andturning the hub until the tape is tight.



229

*[AS29680(ALL)08/95] ■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in themechanism. Remove any loose label material before insertingcassette.

*[AS29685(ALL)08/95] ■ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player. High heat inthe vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.

%*[AS29690(ALL)08/95] Clock Operation

*[AS29695(ALL)08/95] How to view the clock mode

[AS29705(ALL)09/94] Press the “CLK” button to display time. The time will continueto be displayed until a radio or tape function is chosen. Afterapproximately 10 seconds, the time will again appear in thedisplay. To display radio or tape information only, press the“CLK” button a second time.

[AS29710(ALL)09/95] NOTE: With the ignition off, the clock will display forapproximately 5 seconds once the “CLK” button isdepressed and released.

*[AS29715(ALL)08/95] How to set the clock

*[AS29720(ALL)08/95] 1. Turn the radio on.

[AS29725(ALL)04/95] 2. Press and hold the “CLK” button, press the right (a) side ofthe “SEEK” button to increase hours. Press the left (b) sideof the button to decrease hours. Press the right (a) side ofthe “TUNE” button to increase minutes. Press the left (b)side of the button to decrease minutes.

*[AS29730(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PMindications.


230

[AS29735(ALL)09/94] Ford 6-CD Changer (If equipped)[AS29740( X)03/95] The Ford Explorer 6-CD Changer is mounted in your center

console and holds 6 CDs, all controlled by using buttons on theAudio System.

[AS29750(ALL)10/94] Unit Loading Instructions

[AS29755(ALL)06/95] 1. Open Compact Disc Changer unit by sliding door rearward(Figure 1).

[AS29760(ALL)09/94]

10-1/2 pica




231

[AS29765(ALL)03/95] 2. Push the “i” button to eject the disc “magazine” (holds 6discs) (Figure 2).

[AS29770(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica


*[AS29775(ALL)04/94] 3. Load discs into the disc magazine slots (numbered 1 through6) one at a time with labeled surfaces upward, starting withbottom slot number 1 (Figure 3).

[AS29780(ALL)09/94]

10-1/2 pica



232

[AS29785(ALL)08/91] 4. Insert loaded disc magazine into chamber unit with thearrow on top of the disc magazine pointing toward thechanger (Figure 4). Make sure magazine is fully inserted intochanger.

[AS29790(ALL)09/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0060689-A

Figure 4

*[AS29795(ALL)09/95] NOTE: To remove one or more compact disc(s) from the discmagazine, push the corresponding lever(s) to the back.Disc(s) will partially come out for easy removal.

*[AS29805(ALL)01/95] 5. Close unit by sliding changer panel door to the left.

[AS29810(ALL)10/94] The Compact Disc Changer unit is now ready to play using thecontrols of your Audio System.

[AS29817( X)10/94] How to Operate the Ford 6-CD Changer Using theControls on the Radio (Luxury and Premium AudioSystems only)

[AS29821( X)10/94] If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford 6-CD Changer System,you can operate it through the controls of your Luxury orPremium Audio System.

*[AS29822(ALL)02/95] How to begin CD Changer play

[AS29825(ALL)03/95] Press the “CD” button to begin CD play. The 6-CD Changerwill automatically begin playing the first track (selection) of thefirst disc loaded in the unit. The display will indicate “cd-dd”for disc number and track number and then display “TT-tt” fortrack number and the “dd-tt” for current disc and track number.



233

*[AS29830(ALL)01/95] If the CD Changer is empty, “NO” and “DISC” will flash in thedisplay and radio play will continue.

*[AS29835(ALL)02/95] How to change the disc being played

[AS29840(ALL)10/94] When in the CD mode, you can change discs by pressing theright side (a) of the “TUNE DISC” button (to select the nextdiscs) or the left side (b) of the “TUNE DISCS” button (toselect previous discs). Play will begin on the first track of theselected disc.

[AS29845(ALL)10/94] If either side of the button is pressed and held, the CD Changerwill continue fast-forwarding or reversing through the discs inthe disc magazine. During these functions, the display willindicate the disc number.

*[AS29850(ALL)02/95] How to change the track being played

[AS29855(ALL)04/94] There are two ways to change the track being played. You canuse the “SEEK” or “SCAN” buttons.

[AS29860(ALL)04/94] ■ Using the “SEEK” function with your CD-Changer

[AS29865(ALL)10/94] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to seekforward to the next track of the current disc. After the lasttrack has been completed, the CD player automaticallychanges to the next disc.

[AS29870(ALL)04/94] Press the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button to seek to theprevious track on the current disc.

[AS29875(ALL)04/94] ■ Using the SCAN function with your CD Changer

[AS29880(ALL)10/94] Press the “SCAN” button to move forward to the next track.Approximately an eight-second sampling of the track will beplayed before moving to the next track. The display willindicate the disc and track number (dd-tt). At the end of thedisc, the CD Changer automatically changes to the next disc.

[AS29885(ALL)04/94] To end the scan mode, press the “SCAN” button a secondtime.


234

*[AS29905(ALL)04/95] Operating the CD Compression feature

[AS29910(ALL)04/94] Because of the wide dynamic range of Ford’s 6-CD ChangerSystem, soft passages may be difficult to hear under certaindriving conditions while maintaining a reasonable volume levelin the louder passages. The compression feature will bring thesesoft and loud passages closer together for a more consistentlistening level.

*[AS29915(ALL)01/95] To turn the compression on, press the “COMPRESS”/#5 button.When the compression feature is activated, the display willindicate “C”.

*[AS29916(ALL)02/95] Operating the Shuffle feature

*[AS29917(ALL)01/95] While in the CD mode, pressing the “SHUFFLE”/#6 button willrandomly select a track from the disc currently being played.The display will indicate “SHF” followed by the disc and tracknumber (dd-tt).

*[AS29918(ALL)01/95] The CD Changer will continue to randomly select tracks forplay until the shuffle feature is turned off by pressing the“SHUFFLE” button a second time.

*[AS29919(ALL)02/95] How to stop CD play

*[AS29920(ALL)01/95] While in the CD mode, press the “AM/FM” button to stop CDplay and resume radio play. Also, loading a cassette into thecassette deck will stop CD play and begin cassette play.

*[AS29935(ALL)02/95] CD Error Messages

*[AS29936(ALL)01/95] Your system is equipped to diagnose certain problems you mayexperience. The error codes are:

*[AS29937(ALL)01/95] — CD E1 — Mechanism error.

*[AS29938(ALL)01/95] — CD E2 — Focus error.

*[AS29939(ALL)01/95] — BAD CD — Disc unreadable.



235

*[AS29940(ALL)01/95] — TOO HOT — Mechanism over 167˚ Farenheit, allow to coolbefore playing.

*[AS29941(ALL)01/95] — NO CD — Empty slot or magazine.

*[AS29942(ALL)01/95] — NO DJ — CD Changer not connected or not communicating.

*[AS29943(ALL)01/95] Common Operating Conditions of the CD Player

*[AS29944(ALL)08/95] The following information is designed to help you recognizetypical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted asmechanical malfunctions of the disc player.

*[AS29945(ALL)08/95] ■ A disc is already loaded.

*[AS29946(ALL)08/95] ■ The disc is inserted with the label surface downward.

*[AS29947(ALL)08/95] ■ The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS29948(ALL)08/95] ■ The player’s internal temperature is above 140˚F (60˚C).Allow the player to cool off before operating.

*[AS29949(ALL)08/95] ■ Different manufacturers of compact discs may produce discswith different dimensions or tolerances, some of which maynot be within industry standards or in accordance with theCD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dustand scratches could be defective and may not play on yourFord Compact Disc Player.

*[AS29950(ALL)09/95] If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed:

*[AS29951(ALL)08/95] ■ The radio is not on.

[AS29952(ALL)10/94] ■ The discs are inserted improperly in the magazine or the CDmagazine is not inserted.

*[AS29953(ALL)08/95] ■ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses within the unit.If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately anhour until the moisture evaporates.


236

*[AS29954(ALL)08/95] If the sound skips:

*[AS29955(ALL)08/95] ■ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will causethe sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc playeror scratch the discs.

*[AS29956(ALL)01/95] How to take care of and clean the CD Changer anddiscs

*[AS29957(ALL)01/95] To ensure the continued performance of your CD Changercarefully read the following precautions:

*[AS29958(ALL)01/95] ■ Always handle a disc by the edge. Never touch the playingsurface.

[AS29959(ALL)06/95] ■ Before playing, inspect all discs for any contamination. Ifneeded, clean discs with an approved disc cleaner, such asthe Discwasher Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to theedges. Do not use a circular motion to clean.

*[AS29960(ALL)08/95] ■ Do not clean discs with solvents such as benzine, thinner,commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intendedfor analog records.

*[AS29961(ALL)01/95] ■ Do not expose the discs to direct sunlight or heat sources foran extended period of time.

*[AS29962(ALL)01/95] ■ Do not insert more than one disc into each disc slot of thedisc magazine. Doing so may damage the discs, discmagazine or the disc changer.

*[AS29963(ALL)01/95] ■ Do not insert anything other than discs into the discmagazine.

*[AS29964(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The laser beam used in the compact disc player isharmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble thecase.


Electronic

Sound

System

s237

[AS

29965(A

LL)09/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:0060684-A

Midline

StereoR

adio

File:09unasx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996

238

[AS29968( X)10/94] Midline Stereo Radio

*[AS29970(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS29972(ALL)08/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS29973(ALL)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the radio on. Pressagain to turn it off.

*[AS29975(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume

[AS29980(ALL)06/95] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob clockwise to increase thevolume and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Barsilluminate in the display to show relative volume level.

*[AS29985(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listeninglevel when the ignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, the volume willcome back to a “nominal” listening level. However, ifthe radio power is turned off, the volume will remainin the position it was set at when radio power wasswitched off.

*[AS29990(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

[AS29995(ALL)10/94] Push the “AM”/FM“ button to select the desired frequencyband or to stop/store cassette tape (when in cassette mode).These functions are used with the station memory buttonsdescribed under How to tune radio stations.

%*[AS30000(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations

[AS30005(ALL)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. Youcan manually locate the station using the ”TUNE“ button,”SEEK“ button, ”SCAN“ button, or select the station by usingthe memory buttons, which you can set to any desiredfrequency. These four methods are described below.



239

*[AS30010(ALL)09/95] ■ Using the ”TUNE“ function

*[AS30015(ALL)03/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment ata time by pressing and releasing either the left (b) or right(a) side of the ”TUNE“ button.

*[AS30020(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcastfrequency, whether or not a station is present on thatfrequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)

*[AS30025(ALL)08/95] ■ Using the ”SEEK“ function

*[AS30030(ALL)09/95] This feature on your radio allows you to automatically selectlistenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press theright (a) side of the ”SEEK“ button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b)side of the button to select the next listenable station downthe frequency band. By holding the button down, listenablestations can be passed over to reach the desired station.

*[AS30035(ALL)01/95] ■ Using the ”SCAN“ function

*[AS30040(ALL)04/95] Pressing the ”SCAN“ button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on each listenable station forapproximately five seconds.

*[AS30045(ALL)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station,press the ”SCAN“ button again.

*[AS30050(ALL)08/95] ■ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS30055(ALL)02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AMstations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

*[AS30060(ALL)08/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desiredfrequencies:

*[AS30065(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.


240

*[AS30075(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the buttonuntil the sound returns. That station is now held in memoryon that button.

*[AS30080(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory presetbutton you want to set.

*[AS30085(ALL)08/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of yourradio

*[AS30090(ALL)08/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS30095(ALL)03/95] Press the top (c) of the ”BASS“ button to increase bass;press the bottom (d) of the ”BASS“ button to decrease bass.

*[AS30100(ALL)08/95] ■ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS30105(ALL)03/95] Press the top (c) of the ”TREBLE“ button to increase treble;press the bottom (d) of the treble button to decrease treble.

*[AS30110(ALL)08/95] ■ Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS30115(ALL)03/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the right and left speakers. Press the top (c) of the”BAL“ button to shift the sound to the right speakers, andpress the bottom (d) of the ”BAL“ button to shift the soundto the left speakers.

*[AS30120(ALL)08/95] ■ Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS30125(ALL)03/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distributionbetween the front and rear speakers. Press the top (c) ofthe ”FADE“ button to shift the sound to the front speakers,and press the bottom (d) of the ”FADE“ button to shift thesound to the back speakers.

*[AS30130(ALL)06/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels ofbass and treble, and positions of speaker balance andfader functions (left to right, front to rear).



241

%*[AS30401(ALL)08/95] Clock Operation

*[AS30411(ALL)08/95] How to view the clock mode

[AS30421(ALL)09/94] Press the ”CLK“ button to display time. The time will continueto be displayed until a radio or tape function is chosen. Afterapproximately 10 seconds, the time will again appear in thedisplay. To display radio or tape information only, press the”CLK“ button a second time.

[AS30431(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The clock can be displayed or set whether the ignitionis on or off.

*[AS30441(ALL)08/95] How to set the clock

*[AS30451(ALL)08/95] 1. Turn the radio on.

[AS30461(ALL)04/95] 2. Press and hold the ”CLK“ button, press the right (a) side ofthe ”SEEK“ button to increase hours. Press the left (b) sideof the button to decrease hours. Press the right (a) side ofthe ”TUNE“ button to increase minutes. Press the left (b)side of the button to decrease minutes.

*[AS30471(ALL)09/95] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PMindications.

%*[AS35200(ALL)08/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS35300(ALL)08/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completelyclear and noise-free, such as the following:

*[AS35400(ALL)08/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS35500(ALL)08/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distancethe signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FMsignal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond thisdistance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signalbecomes weaker.


242

*[AS35600(ALL)08/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS35700(ALL)08/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area overwhich the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from beingnoise-free.

*[AS35900(ALL)08/95] If there is a building or large structure between the antenna andstation, some of the signal ”bends“ around the building, butcertain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the”shadow“ of the structure will allow the station to return tonormal.

*[AS36000(ALL)08/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or structures, thereflected signal cancels the normal signal, causing the antenna topick up noise and distortion. Cancellation effects are mostprominent in metropolitan areas, but also can become quitesevere in hilly terrain and depressed roadways.

*[AS36100(ALL)08/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono blend circuit hasbeen incorporated into this system. This feature automaticallyswitches a weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,which improves the quality of reception.

*[AS36200(ALL)08/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions on AMfrequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences,traffic lights and thunderstorms.

*[AS36300(ALL)08/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture andOverload. This can occur when listening to a weak station andwhen passing another broadcast tower. The close station maycapture the more distant station, although the displayedfrequency does not change. While passing the tower, the stationmay switch back and forth a few times before returning to theoriginal station.

*[AS36400(ALL)08/95] When several broadcast towers are present (common inmetropolitan areas) several stations may overload the receiver,resulting in considerable station changing, mixing anddistortion.



243

*[AS36500(ALL)08/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands hasbeen incorporated into this system to reduce strong signalcapture and overload.

%*[AS36600(ALL)08/95] All About Radio Frequencies

*[AS36700(ALL)08/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and theCanadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)establish the frequencies that AM and FM radio stations mayuse for their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, AM: 530,540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.

*[AS36800(ALL)08/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radiowill tune to each of these frequencies using manual tune and nofine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use otherfrequencies.

*[AS36900(ALL)08/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a ”rounded-off“ frequencywhich is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7MHz may call itself ”Radio 99“ even though 99.0 MHz is not anallowable FM broadcast frequency.

%*[AS37000(ALL)08/95] Important Warranty and Service Information

*[AS37050(ALL)08/95] Warranty

*[AS37100(ALL)08/95] Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles(60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehiclewarranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for acopy of this limited warranty.

*[AS37300(ALL)08/95] Service

*[AS37400(ALL)08/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with acomprehensive service and repair program. If anything shouldgo wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Fordauthorized repair centers to assist you.


244

Notes


245

Driving Your Explorer

*[DR00350(ALL)06/95] Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary depending onwhich type of transmission your vehicle has.

*[DR00600(ALL)06/95] ■ a manual transmission

[DR05475( X)12/95] ■ an Automatic Overdrive Transmission 4R55E or 4R70W

[DR05700(ALL)1/96] Automatic Transmission Operation4R44E/4R55E/4R70W

*[DR08715(ALL)12/95] The 4R44E, 4R55E and 4R70W transmissions are electronicallycontrolled four speed overdrive automatic transmissions withlockup torque converter. Transmission operation is controlled bythe Powertrain Control Module (PCM).

*[DR08720(ALL)08/95] The PCM will automatically adjust transmission operation tomake up for varying conditions. Several sensors located on theengine and transmission such as throttle position, engine speed,vehicle speed and transmission temperature are used by thePCM to shift the transmission into a higher or lower gear whenrequired for the best performance and fuel economy. Forexample, you may notice that the transmission will upshift to ahigher gear more quickly when the vehicle has not reachednormal operating temperature.

*[DR08730(ALL)08/95] The PCM also controls the transmission’s Torque ConverterClutch (TCC) to further raise vehicle performance and fueleconomy. The TCC will engage when the transmission operatingtemperature and other conditions determined by the PCM havebeen met. Engagement of the clutch may be noted as a decreasein engine speed.

[DR08740(ALL)03/95] To help in troubleshooting, the PCM continually performsself-tests on the electronic control system and, if any faults aredetected, stores them in memory. The Overdrive Off IndicatorLight (O/D OFF), which is located on the instrument cluster,may flash steadily if a malfunction has been detected. If the

File:10undrx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996

246

Overdrive Off Indicator Light is flashing, contact your Forddealer as soon as possible. If this condition persists, damage tothe transmission could occur.

%*[DR08750(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

[DR08800(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steering column. Thetransmission control switch is located on the end of the gearshiftlever. You can put the gearshift in any of the several positions.

[DR08915(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021373-AThe positions of the column-mounted gearshift

[DR08925(ALL)01/95]

quarter page

art:0021255-A Transmission control switch (located on the end of the gearshift lever)



247

*[DR09000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshiftlever from position to position. If you do not hold thebrake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedlyand injure someone.

*[DR09100(ALL)01/95] Once you place the gearshift securely into position, graduallyrelease the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary.

%*[DR09110(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlockfeature. This feature prevents you from shifting fromP (Park) unless you have the brake pedal depressed.(The ignition must be in the ON position.) If youcannot shift from P (Park) with the brake pedaldepressed:

*[DR09120(ALL)01/95] 1. Apply the parking brake.

*[DR09130(ALL)01/95] 2. Remove the key.

*[DR09140(ALL)08/95] 3. Insert the key and rotate it one position clockwise (ignitionin the OFF position).

*[DR09150(ALL)08/95] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). (If thevehicle is shifted back to P [Park], you must repeat theprevious steps.)

*[DR09160(ALL)01/95] 5. Start the vehicle.

*[DR09165(ALL)07/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternateprocedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blownand that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Explorer in this OwnerGuide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFYTHAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING.


248

%*[DR09200(ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)

*[DR09300(ALL)08/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle willmove backward. You should always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R (Reverse).

*[DR09350(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

*[DR09375(ALL)01/95] With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position, the vehicle can bestarted and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while inthis position.

%*[DR09400(ALL)01/95] Driving

%*[DR09500(ALL)04/95] When to use j (Overdrive)

*[DR09600(ALL)04/95] This is the normal driving position. As the vehicle picks upspeed, automatic upshifts to second, third and fourth gears willoccur when j Overdrive is chosen on the selector and thetransmission control switch has not been pressed. Thetransmission will shift into the correct gear when the rightspeed is achieved, for the accelerator pedal position you havechosen.

*[DR09700(ALL)03/94] When to use Drive

[DR09800(ALL)06/95] You will note there is not a drive position on your gearshiftindicator. However, you will find a transmission control switchlabeled O/D ON/OFF located on the end of the gearshift lever.Press this switch and the O/D OFF indicator light willilluminate on the instrument cluster. With overdrive cancelledand the O/D OFF indicator light illuminated, the transmissionwill operate in gears one through three. This is useful if youexperience frequent downshift/upshift conditions, whenoperating with a heavy load or in hilly terrain, or if additionalengine braking is useful. However, shift back to j (Overdrive)whenever practical for optimum powertrain cooling and fueleconomy. This can be accomplished by pushing the transmissioncontrol switch again, to cancel the O/D OFF control and light.



249

[DR09850(ALL)01/95]

quarter page

art:0021255-A Transmission control switch (located on the end of the gearshift lever)

*[DR09900(ALL)05/95] To return the transmission to the normal j Overdriveoperation, press the transmission control switch again. TheTransmission Control Indicator Light will not be illuminatedwhen Overdrive operation resumes. This switch may be used toselect O/D ON or O/D OFF any time the vehicle is beingdriven.

*[DR09950(ALL)05/94] When starting your vehicle, the overdrive system willautomatically be in the normal overdrive mode.

*[DR10100(ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second)

*[DR10200(ALL)01/95] Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provideadditional engine braking on downgrades. This positionprovides 2 (Second) gear operation only.

*[DR10300(ALL)01/95] When to use 1 (Low)

*[DR10400(ALL)04/95] Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum engine braking on steepdowngrades. Upshifts from 1 (Low) can be made by manuallyshifting to 2 (Second) or j (Overdrive). Selection of 1 (Low)gear provides only low gear operation from start-up. Selectionof 1 (Low) while at higher speeds provides a shift to secondgear, and a shift to first gear will occur after the vehicledecelerates to the proper speed.


250

*[DR10500(ALL)01/95] P (Park)

*[DR10600(ALL)03/94] Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park).This position locks the transmission and prevents the rearwheels from turning. To securely latch the gearshift in the P(Park) position, pull it toward you, push it completelycounterclockwise against the stop, and then push it toward theinstrument panel.

*[DR10650(ALL)03/94] The gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot rotateit in a clockwise direction without lifting it toward you.


Always set the parking brake fully and make sure thegearshift is securely latched in P (Park).


Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running.

*[DR11100(ALL)06/94] Forced Downshifts

*[DR11200(ALL)04/95] To gain extra acceleration in j Overdrive or Drive (O/D OFF),push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission willautomatically downshift to the appropriate gear: third, secondor first.

*[DR11235(ALL)03/94] Power Braking

*[DR11275(ALL)03/94] Increasing the engine speed above idle without vehiclemovement (such as holding the brake) in a forward or reversegear causes transmission stall.

*[DR11285(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Continued operation in the stall condition can resultin transmission overheat, malfunction or fluidexpulsion.



251

[DR11300(ALL)08/94] Manual Transmission Operation%*[DR11400(ALL)03/95] Using the Clutch

*[DR11500(ALL)01/95] Make sure the gearshift lever is in the N (Neutral) position andyour right foot is holding down the brake pedal. Then press theclutch pedal to the floor with your left foot. Manualtransmission vehicles have a starter interlock switch. The starterwill not crank until the clutch pedal is fully depressed. Start theengine and allow it to idle for a few seconds. Move thegearshift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse).

*[DR11600(ALL)03/91] To move the vehicle, release the clutch slowly and at the sametime press down slowly on the accelerator so that the vehicleaccelerates.

*[DR11700(ALL)03/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and donot use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill whilewaiting on a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life.

*[DR11750(ALL)03/95] Driving with your foot resting on the clutch may cause thevehicle to jerk sharply when pressing or removing your otherfoot from the accelerator.

%*[DR11800(ALL)03/95] Shifting the Gears

*[DR11900(ALL)02/95] The gearshift for a manual transmission is mounted on the floor.The gearshift pattern consists of seven positions: Neutral, fiveforward gears, and Reverse.

[DR12000(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021180-B

5-Speed Overdrive manual transmission shift pattern


252

*[DR12300(ALL)03/91] Backing up

*[DR12400(ALL)03/95] To shift into R (Reverse):

*[DR12501(ALL)03/91] 1. Push the clutch pedal in all the way to the floor and hold it.If you do not hold the clutch pedal in all the way, you mayhear a grinding noise when you shift.

*[DR12551(ALL)03/93] 2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop. Failure to do so maycause synchronizer teeth damage, reducing the useful life ofyour transmission.

*[DR12600(ALL)08/94] 3. Put the gearshift in Neutral and wait at least 3 secondsbefore shifting into R (Reverse) to prevent a grinding noise.Do not release the clutch.

*[DR12700(ALL)08/94] 4. Push the gearshift all the way to the right and pull it backinto Reverse.

*[DR12800(ALL)01/95] With the 5-speed transmission you can engage R (Reverse) onlyby moving the gearshift from the left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth)gears before you shift into R (Reverse). This is a special lockoutfeature that protects you from accidentally shifting into R whenyou downshift from 5 (Fifth) gear.

*[DR12950( X)02/92] 5. Once R (Reverse) is engaged, slowly release the clutch pedalfrom the floor.

*[DR13000(ALL)03/94] If R (Reverse) is not engaged, continue to push the clutch pedalin while you put the gearshift back into Neutral. Then, releasethe clutch pedal for a moment and repeat steps 2 through 5.

*[DR13100(ALL)03/91] Upshifting/downshifting

[DR13200(ALL)01/95] Upshift and downshift at the speeds that are specfied in thecharts.



253

%*[DR13250(ALL)06/95] Recommended Shift Speeds

[DR14950(ALL)04/94] Engines with 5-Speed Manual Overdrive Transmission

[DR15000(ALL)10/94]

thirty pica

chart:0021181-D


254

*[DR15100(ALL)03/95] When you slow down or climb a steep hill, always downshiftbefore the engine starts to lose power. Downshifting reduces thechance of stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration toincrease speed again.

*[DR15200(ALL)03/95] When you drive down steep hills, downshifting helps you keepa safe speed and helps prevent unnecessary wear on the brakes.

*[DR15300(ALL)03/95] When you come to a stop, do not downshift through each gear.Disengage the clutch and use the brake as necessary.Downshifting through the gears decreases your vehicle’s fueleconomy.


Continued use of a damaged or worn clutch, prolongedclutch slippage or downshifting at excessive speeds canresult in a failure of the engine, transmission or clutchcomponents.

*[DR15500(ALL)03/91] Transmission Function

[DR15600(ALL)10/94] Upshift at the speeds specified in the chart. All forward gearsare synchronized allowing you to shift into them with yourvehicle in motion. The clutch pedal should be fully depressedwhen shifting.

*[DR15625(ALL)04/94] NOTE: Shifting during extremely low rpm’s can result in amomentary audible rattle which disappears as vehiclerpm’s are increased. Shifting at higher speeds willeliminate this sound.

*[DR15700(ALL)03/95] Parking

*[DR15800(ALL)01/95] To park your vehicle, apply the service brake pedal, and shiftinto N (Neutral) while still maintaining pressure on the servicebrake. Set the parking brake fully. Shift into first and turn offthe ignition.



255


Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may moveunexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear andset the parking brake fully.

%*[DR15915(ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle%*[DR15945( X)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power steering uses

energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle.

%*[DR15950(ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at aconstant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked.If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes moreeffort.

*[DR15960(ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left formore than five seconds if the engine is running. This candamage the power steering pump.

*[DR15985(ALL)05/90] NOTE: After any severe impact such as striking largepotholes, sliding into curbs on icy roads, or a collisioninvolving the front end, observe the steering wheelalignment. If the spokes of the steering wheel seem tobe in a different position while going straight downthe road, have the front suspension and steeringchecked for possible damage.


256

%*[DR16101(ALL)03/95] Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) System(If equipped)

[DR16130(ALL)10/94] When you select the 4WD mode, your vehicle uses all fourwheels to power itself. This increases traction, enabling you todrive your 4x4 over terrain and road conditions not travellednormally by two-wheel drive vehicles.

*[DR16160(ALL)10/94] Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case thatallows you to select four-wheel drive when necessary. Methodsfor engaging and disengaging 4WD and low range will dependon which system your vehicle has.

[DR17585( X)01/95] 4WD Systems — Control Trac

[DR17615( X)01/95] The Control Trac 4WD system functions in three modes. Intwo-wheel drive mode, power is delivered only to the rear axle.The 4WD AUTO position provides four-wheel drive with fullpower delivered to the rear axle, and to the front axle asrequired for increased traction. The 4WD LOW positionprovides four-wheel drive with full power delivered to the frontand rear axles when above average power is required atreduced speeds.

[DR17645( X)01/95] Four-wheel drive operation (4WD LOW) on dry pavement is notrecommended. Operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW on drypavement will increase noise, vibration, tire wear, and decreasefuel economy.

[DR17690( X)08/94] Control Trac system indicator lights

[DR17735( X)03/95] A 4WD indicator light and a 4WD LOW indicator light arelocated in the instrument cluster. If either light flashes, takeyour vehicle in for service.

[DR17750(ALL)01/95] ■ Two-Wheel Drive mode — Neither the 4WD nor the 4WDLOW lights are lit.

[DR17790( X)1/96] ■ 4WD Auto mode — Only the 4WD light is lit.



257

[DR17810(ALL)10/95] ■ 4WD LOW mode — Only the 4WD LOW light is lit.

[DR17855( X)10/94] To shift from Two-Wheel Drive to 4WD AUTO:

[DR17900( X)10/94] To shift into 4WD AUTO, rotate the 4WD switch located on theinstrument panel to 4WD AUTO. This shift can be done at astop or on the fly.

[DR17910( X)01/95] The initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD AUTO while thevehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunks andratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up tospeed and is not a cause for concern.

[DR17920( X)01/95] Because of possible damage to drivetrain components, nevershift from two-wheel drive to 4WD with the rear wheelsslipping.

[DR17935( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021252-BElectric shift switch

[DR18030( X)10/94] To shift from 4WD AUTO to Two-Wheel Drive:

[DR18060( X)01/95] Rotate the 4WD switch to 2WD; the light on the instrumentcluster will go out indicating the vehicle is in two-wheel drive.This can be done at any speed.


258

[DR18230( X)10/94] To shift from 4WD AUTO or 2WD to 4WD LOW:

[DR18290( X)01/95] Stop the vehicle, depress the brake and place the automatictransmission in N (Neutral) or depress the clutch on vehicleswith a manual transmission. Rotate the 4WD switch on theinstrument panel to 4WD LOW. Both the 4WD and 4WD LOWlights are now lit.

[DR18293( X)06/95] For Explorers equipped with Automatic Ride Control:

[DR18294( X)06/95] After shifting to 4WD LOW, wait about 90 seconds. This willimprove ground clearance and off-road handling. Refer toAutomatic Ride Control in the Features chapter.

[DR18320( X)08/94] To shift from 4WD LOW to 4WD AUTO or 2WD:

[DR18400( X)01/95] Stop the vehicle, depress the brake and place the automatictransmission into N (Neutral) or depress the clutch on vehicleswith a manual transmission. Rotate the 4WD switch on theinstrument panel to 4WD AUTO or 2WD.

[DR18500(ALL)03/95] It is not recommended to operate the vehicle in the 4WD modeswith a temporary spare. If 4WD operation is necessary, do notoperate at speeds above 10 mph or for distances above 50 miles.Extended operation in 4WD with a temporary spare may resultin damage to drivetrain components.

[DR18600( X)12/95] All-Wheel Drive System (If equipped)[DR18620( X)12/95] If your vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD), power

is constantly supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case.The AWD system is full-time and has no external controls.

[DR18630( X)12/95] The AWD transfer case utilizes a viscous clutch that distributestorque to the front and rear differentials (approximately 35%front and 65% rear). The viscous clutch is filled with ahigh-viscosity fluid, see Lubricant Specifications in the ServicingYour Explorer chapter for more information.



259

[DR18640( X)1/96] Vehicles equipped with AWD are more capable of superiortraction in wet and dry conditions than 2-wheel drive vehicles.AWD vehicles are also capable of being driven on sand, snow,mud, and rough terrain and have operating characteristics thatare the same as vehicles equipped with 4WD. For moreinformation on driving off-road, see Driving Off Road with4-Wheel Drive and AWD and the Four Wheeling With Fordsupplement in your owner’s portfolio.

%*[DR19200(ALL)12/95] Driving Off Road with 4-Wheel Drive and AWD

*[DR19300(ALL)12/95] Vehicles equipped with four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive areespecially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud, or roughterrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhatdifferent from conventional vehicles, both off and on the road.The driving tips below will help you learn to use four-wheeldrive.

*[DR19400( X)10/94] ■ Do not use 4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads.

*[DR19600(ALL)11/89] ■ Special maintenance procedures are necessary after operatingwith drive components in water.

*[DR19800(ALL)12/95] When using four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive, maintainsteering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steeringwheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel rim fromthe outside. Do not grip the spokes.

*[DR19900(ALL)05/90] Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objectssuch as rocks and stumps. Know the terrain or examine maps ofthe area in question before driving. Map out your routebeforehand. To maintain steering and braking control of yourvehicle, you must have all four tires on the ground, and theymust be rolling, not sliding or spinning.

[DR19925(ALL)10/94] Transmission upshift in 4WD with transfer case in 4WD LOWmay be quite firm due to large total gear reduction. Thiscondition is normal.


260

*[DR20000(ALL)11/89] Sand

*[DR20100(ALL)11/89] When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels of thevehicle on the most solid area of the trail. Do not reduce thetire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadilythrough the terrain. Apply accelerator slowly and avoidspinning the wheels.

*[DR20200(ALL)11/89] Mud and Water

*[DR20300(ALL)12/89] When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid waterhigher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceedslowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.

*[DR20400(ALL)11/89] Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do notstop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can beimproved by moving your vehicle slowly, while applying lightpressure on the brake pedal.

*[DR20500(ALL)11/89] After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotatingdriveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotatingdriveshafts causes an imbalance which could damage drivecomponents.

*[DR20525(ALL)06/95] NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case is submerged inwater, their fluids should be checked and changed, ifnecessary.

*[DR20650( X)11/89] Additional Special Driving Instructions forUtility Vehicles

*[DR20701(ALL)11/89] Driving on Hill or Slope Terrain

[DR20800(ALL)08/94] When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning onsteep slopes, you could lose traction and slip sideways. Drivestraight up, straight down or avoid the hill completely. Knowthe conditions on the other side of a hill before driving over thecrest.



261

*[DR20900(ALL)11/89] When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear, rather thanfinding it necessary to downshift from a higher gear after theascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and thepossibility of stalling.

*[DR21000(ALL)11/89] When descending a steep hill avoid sudden braking. Rapidpumping of the brake pedal will help slow the vehicle and stillmaintain steering control.

*[DR21101(ALL)11/89] Driving on Snow or Ice

*[DR21200(ALL)12/95] A four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive vehicle has advantagesover two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid likeany other vehicle. If so equipped, keep the vehicle in four-wheeldrive if icy or slippery conditions exist.

*[DR21300(ALL)11/89] Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes ofdirection on snow or ice. Apply the accelerator slowly andsteadily when starting from a full stop.

*[DR21310(ALL)05/95] All utility-type and Four-Wheel Drive vehicles have specialdesign and equipment features to make them capable ofperforming in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specificdesign characteristics give them higher centers of gravity thanordinary passenger cars.


Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are NOT designedfor cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars anymore than low-slung sports cars are designed to performsatisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles.

%*[DR21400(ALL)03/95] Brakes

*[DR21500(ALL)01/93] Front Disc Brakes

*[DR21600(ALL)06/95] The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They do not requireservice other than periodic inspection for pad wear.


262

*[DR21700( X)07/93] Rear Disc Brakes

[DR21800( X)06/94] The rear disc brakes are self-adjusting. They do not require anyservice other than periodic inspection for pad wear.

*[DR22100(ALL)11/89] Hydraulic Power Brakes

[DR22200(ALL)08/94] The hydraulic brake system is made up of two independenthydraulic circuits. One hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to thefront disc brakes and the other hydraulic circuit supplies fluidto the rear drum or disc brakes. These two circuits are suppliedby a common hydraulic brake fluid reservoir, with a fluid levelsensor.

*[DR22300(ALL)11/89] The brake light in the instrument cluster will light for low brakefluid in the common brake fluid reservoir.


An increase in pedal travel will result in reduced brakingcapability. The brake system should be checkedimmediately.

[DR22905(ALL)10/94] Four Wheel Anti-lock Brake System

*[DR22910( X)08/94] Your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-lock BrakingSystem (4WABS). The 4WABS helps the driver to maintainvehicle control by preventing wheel lockup during hardbraking.

*[DR22915(ALL)03/94] The 4WABS operates with a computer that is able to optimizevehicle control during braking on varying tire and roadconditions by modulating the brake pressure at each of the frontwheels and the rear axle. This “pumping action” is similar tothe driver “pumping” the brakes but happens at a much fasterrate.



263


The Anti-lock system does NOT assist the vehicle instopping quickly on wet or icy surfaces. Heavy brakingcombined with poor road conditions could cause you tolose steering control of your vehicle.

*[DR22925(ALL)10/94] Using anti-lock brakes

*[DR22930(ALL)05/94] The operation of a vehicle with 4WABS is not similar to theoperation of normal brakes. Some differences exist and are listedbelow:

*[DR22935(ALL)10/94] ■ Apply the brake steadily. In the event of a panic stop, doNOT “pump” the brakes. “Pumping” the brakes during anAnti-lock stop will diminish braking effectiveness.

%*[DR22940(ALL)10/94] ■ During an Anti-lock stop, the driver will notice a brakepedal pulsation and hear some noise from the enginecompartment. This is an indication that the 4WABS system isworking correctly and is normal.


The Anti-lock system does NOT decrease the timenecessary to apply the brakes. Always leave enough roombetween the vehicle in front of you and your vehicle.

*[DR22950(ALL)05/95] 4WABS driver warning light[DR22955(ALL)10/94] The 4WABS computer continuously monitors the system while

driving for any electrical faults or system malfunctions. Inaddition, the 4WABS computer performs an initial system checkcalled bulb proveout when the vehicle ignition is switched on.During bulb proveout, the ABS light on the instrument clusterwill momentarily illuminate and then go out.

*[DR22960(ALL)09/95] NOTE: After starting the vehicle and upon initial drive-off,the driver may notice a single pulse of the brakepedal and a noise from the engine compartment. Thisis part of the initial system check and is normal.


264

[DR22965(ALL)05/95] Should a malfunction in the 4WABS system occur, the ABS lighton the instrument cluster will come on and stay on indicatingthat the anti-lock system has been shut down and the vehicleneeds to be serviced. Normal braking is not affected unless thebrake warning light is also illuminated.

*[DR22970(ALL)09/95] NOTE: It is important to note that when the ABS WarningLight is illuminated the ABS system is disabled. Thevehicle must be serviced immediately to restore thebenefits of the Anti-lock system.

*[DR22975(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Mobile phones or radio transmitters not installed byFord Motor Company may interfere with the Anti-lockSystem. Should the Anti-lock system activateunexpectedly or the Anti-lock Warning Lightilluminate after installation of such a unit, have theinstallation of the unit checked.

%*[DR23000(ALL)12/89] If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low”

*[DR23250(ALL)11/89] If during normal operation the brake pedal seems “low”, it mayindicate the need for a brake system inspection and/or service.You should have your brakes checked as soon as possible.

*[DR23300(X)07/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does notaffect the function of the brake system and is normal. However,if the squeal becomes louder or more frequent, have yourbrakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified service technician.


Modifications to the suspension spring rates and/orvehicle ride height may adversely affect vehicle stoppingability.



265

*[DR23500(ALL)07/92] If Brakes Pull

*[DR23600(ALL)05/95] ■ Check tire pressure.

[DR23710( X)07/95] ■ If pull occurs during the first 500 miles (800 km), make 10moderatley fast stops from 40 mph (64 km/h). It may benecessary to repeat this operation to properly seat newbrakes.

*[DR23800(ALL)05/95] If pull occurs during the first 500 miles (800 km), make 10moderately fast stops from 40 mph (65 km/h) and thenperform the self-adjustment procedure above. It may benecessary to repeat this operation to properly seat new brakelinings and pads.

%*[DR24000(ALL)01/93] Stopping Distances

*[DR24100(ALL)11/89] Stopping distances vary with different loads and drivingconditions. Use caution when encountering new conditions andacquaint yourself with vehicle performance. Take full advantageof engine braking power when slowing down.

%*[DR24200(ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

*[DR24300(ALL)05/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique— push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. Thisallows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.

*[DR24400(ALL)07/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Thiswill increase your vehicle’s stopping distance and may alsocause brake damage.


If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to alower gear. Do not apply your brakes continuously, asthey may overheat and become less effective.


266

%*[DR24600(ALL)03/95] Using the Parking Brake

*[DR24650(ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used whenever you park yourvehicle.

*[DR24800(ALL)12/91] The parking brake pedal is suspended just below the bottom ofthe instrument panel to the left of service brake and/or clutchpedals. To set the parking brake while parking your vehicle,press the brake pedal with your right foot and hold it whileyou push the parking brake pedal down firmly and fully withyour left foot.

[DR24930(ALL)05/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0020568-DParking brake



267


When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of theparking brake. Turn the key to LOCK whenever youleave your vehicle. Always set the parking brake fullyand make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manualtransmission). Never leave your vehicle unattended whileit is running. If you do not take these precautions, yourvehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.

[DR25015(ALL)03/93] To release the parking brake, press the service brake pedal withyour right foot and hold the parking brake pedal down withyour left foot while you pull the parking brake release lever.Lift your foot from the parking brake pedal after it is released.


If the parking brake is fully released, but the BrakeSystem light remains on, have the brakes checkedimmediately. They may not be working properly.

*[DR25100(ALL)06/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, butyou can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in anemergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parkingbrake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance willincrease greatly and the handling of your vehicle will beadversely affected.

%*[DR25200(ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions%*[DR25250(ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR25301(ALL)07/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handledifferently from your previous vehicle. Use care until youbecome accustomed to its various features and drivingcharacteristics.


268

*[DR25350(ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Suddenacceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of thesemaneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently thananticipated.

*[DR25501(ALL)02/95] Wheel Spin

*[DR25550(ALL)11/92] ■ Extreme acceleration can cause the rear wheels to spin,perhaps resulting in reduced steering control.

[DR26350(ALL)12/92] If the wheels spin, use 2 (Second gear) to gain traction. Moveforward slowly and evenly. If this does not work, try rockingthe vehicle.

*[DR26401(ALL)05/91] For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD, and try to drive away.

%*[DR26550(ALL)05/90] High Speed Driving

*[DR26590(ALL)07/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits.


Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility ofloss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds forextended periods of time may result in damage to vehiclecomponents.

*[DR26625(ALL)12/91] Speed limiter

[DR26652(ALL)01/95] All models are equipped with a Powertrain Control Module(PCM) which limits the maximum engine speed and thus roadspeed in top gear. Vehicle operation is normal since thecontrolled maximum speed is above posted highway speeds inNorth America.



269

%*[DR26701(ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR26750(ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

*[DR26801(ALL)03/95] Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:

*[DR26850(ALL)03/95] ■ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary.

*[DR26901(ALL)01/95] ■ Drive slower than you normally would.

*[DR26951(ALL)01/95] ■ Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

[DR27001(ALL)01/95] ■ Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to avoid lockingyour front wheels (except with 4WABS).

[DR27025(ALL)05/95] ■ To stop on ice, shift to N (Neutral) below 10 mph (15 km/h)and gently pump brakes (except with 4WABS).

*[DR27050(ALL)02/93] ■ Consider using one of the lower gears.

*[DR27101(ALL)05/91] ■ For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD, and try to drive slowly away.


To avoid losing control on slippery roads, do notdownshift into Low with the automatic transmissionwhen moving faster than 20 mph (32 km/h). Do notdownshift into First with the manual transmission whenmoving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

%*[DR27450(ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped)

*[DR27501(ALL)03/95] This axle provides added drive away traction on slipperysurfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surfacewith poor traction.

*[DR27550(ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tires on aTraction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction ineffectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normaldriving and should not be noticeable to the driver.


270


To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel offthe ground, such as when changing a tire.

%*[DR27651(ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR27675(ALL)06/92] Never attempt to cross water that is fast flowing or of unknowndepth.

*[DR27701(ALL)05/90] Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that thewater is below the bottom of the wheel hubs.

*[DR27750(ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You mayhave limited traction or wet brakes, so allow extra stoppingdistance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.

*[DR27801(ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakesgently several times as your vehicle moves slowly. This helps todry the brakes.

*[DR27820(ALL)06/95] NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case is submerged inwater, their fluids should be checked and changed, ifnecessary.

*[DR27825(ALL)03/93] NOTE: All rear axle lube quantities must be replaced every100,000 miles (160,000 km) or if the axle has beensubmerged in water. Otherwise, the lube should notbe checked or changed unless a leak is suspected orrepair required.

*[DR27850(ALL)11/89] Rocking the vehicle

*[DR27901(ALL)05/90] For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD LOW, when the vehicle getsstuck and try to drive away.

*[DR27950(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), youmay rock it out of the spot. Shift in a steady rhythm betweenforward and reverse gears. Allow the transmission to fullyengage, then press lightly on the accelerator. Do not rock thevehicle for more than a few minutes. This may overheat the



271

engine and transmission, causing damage to both. In addition,other vehicle systems and components may also be damaged.


Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). Thetires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

%*[DR28050(ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR28101(ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carryor tow. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of thepassengers and cargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that yourvehicle carries over the front axle and rear axle should never bemore than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for therespective axle.

*[DR28150(ALL)08/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR orGAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higherweight limits than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWRand GAWR limitations.


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehiclemay be damaged or you may lose control and injuresomeone.

*[DR28750(ALL)01/93] Vehicle/Trailer Loads

*[DR28801(ALL)06/92] All vehicles may tow a Class I trailer provided the GrossCombined Weight (GCW) is less than or equal to the GVWRshown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. For heaviertrailer applications, refer to the towing information found laterin this chapter.


272

%*[DR28950(ALL)02/95] Trailer Towing (may require trailer tow option package)

*[DR29001(ALL)03/91] Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For your safetyand for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment forthe type of trailer you tow.

*[DR29025(ALL)09/92] Your trailer towing capability will vary based on the standardand optional equipment on your vehicle. Refer to the followingVehicle Loading/Towing Information and the Trailer Towing Tablesto determine the specific towing capability of your vehicle.

*[DR29050(ALL)02/92] ■ Stay within the load limits when you tow.

*[DR29101(ALL)01/95] ■ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing,making sure to use the right equipment and to attach itproperly. (See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)

*[DR29151(ALL)01/95] ■ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle while you tow.(See Driving while you tow in this chapter.)

*[DR29201(ALL)01/95] ■ Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer.(See Servicing your vehicle if you tow in this chapter.)

*[DR29350(ALL)05/94] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least500 miles (800 km).

%*[DR29401(ALL)06/92] Vehicle Loading/Towing Information

*[DR29450(ALL)03/91] Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, notvolume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space withlarge or heavy loads. Maximum safe vehicle weights as well astire, rim sizes and inflation pressures are specified for yourvehicle at the assembly plant on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label. The Certification Label is located on the leftfront door lock facing or the door latch post pillar.



273

*[DR29501(ALL)12/91] Trucks, unlike passenger cars, are basically custom vehiclesdesigned to carry a load. Most owners start with a base vehicleand add production and dealer installed and/or aftermarketcomponents to suit their tastes and purposes. Even trucks thatare purchased for personal transportation only are likely to haveconsiderable optional equipment, such as step bumpers andlight bars, for example.


It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, insideor outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be seriously injured orkilled.


Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safety belts.


Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.

*[DR29551(ALL)03/91] Each additional item of equipment affects how much cargo avehicle can carry. If a vehicle is overloaded, performance willsuffer and service concerns may arise.

*[DR29601(ALL)04/95] The following is a typical example of a Safety ComplianceCertification Label and an explanation of how this informationshould be used:


274

[DR29750( X)03/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090122-ASafety Compliance Certification Label

*[DR29950(ALL)06/92] Do not use the sample numbers on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label shown. Use the actual numbers from yourvehicle certification label.

*[DR30001(ALL)06/92] Understanding Loading/Towing Information

*[DR30050(ALL)03/94] The following terms are used to describe the ability to carry ortow a load:

*[DR30101(ALL)01/93] ■ Base Curb Weight

*[DR30150(ALL)01/93] ■ Payload

*[DR30200(ALL)01/93] ■ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

*[DR30250(ALL)01/93] ■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

*[DR30301(ALL)01/93] ■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)



275

*[DR30310(ALL)06/92] ■ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

*[DR30320(ALL)06/92] ■ Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

*[DR30330(ALL)06/92] ■ Maximum Trailer Weight

*[DR30340(ALL)06/92] ■ Trailer Weight Range

*[DR30351(ALL)03/91] Base Curb Weight

*[DR30401(ALL)03/94] The Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle includingfuel, coolants, lubricants, emergency tools, spare wheel and tire.It also includes any equipment that is standard on that model. Itdoes not include passengers, cargo or optional equipmentinstalled by factory, dealer, aftermarket supplier or customer.

*[DR30451(ALL)03/91] Payload

*[DR30501(ALL)03/91] Payload is the combined, maximum allowable weight of cargo,occupants and optional equipment that the truck is designed tocarry. It is Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minus the base curbweight.

*[DR30550(ALL)03/91] Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)

*[DR30601(ALL)05/95] If you add base curb weight and the weight of a load (includingpassengers, cargo and optional equipment) being carried at aparticular time, you get the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW).

*[DR30650(ALL)08/95] It is important to remember that GVW is not a limit or aspecification. If an owner loads up a vehicle and weighs it, that’sthe GVW at that moment. If the owner piles on more of a loadand weighs it again, that becomes the GVW.

%*[DR30701(ALL)03/91] Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

*[DR30750(ALL)10/94] To avoid overloading a vehicle, the owner should observe themanufacturer’s specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. TheGVWR is the maximum total weight of base vehicle, passengers,optional components and cargo that a particular vehicle wasdesigned to carry.


276

%*[DR30801(ALL)01/93] Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

*[DR30850(ALL)03/91] We have all seen a car or a truck that is loaded down in therear and riding high in the front. This is a dangerous conditionthat usually means that the rear suspension components areunder severe strain and that vehicle handling is impaired. Thereis more to carrying a load than just payload or GVWR.

*[DR30901(ALL)03/91] Your Safety Compliance Certification Label not only gives theGVWR, it also gives the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)which is the carrying capacity for each axle system. For trucks,the rear axle will be designed to carry more weight than thefront.

*[DR30950(ALL)06/92] The rating is based on the carrying capacity of the lowest ratedaxle and suspension component as well as other factors. This iswhy it’s so important to observe vehicle loading ratings.Overloading a vehicle punishes components and can lead toshortened service life or outright failure.

*[DR31001(ALL)06/92] The capacity of the tires is included as part of the axle andsuspension system, which is to be considered when determiningthe lowest rated component. Tires are rated to carry a specificmaximum load at a specific maximum tire pressure.

*[DR31050(ALL)06/92] Passenger car type tires when installed on light trucks andmultipurpose passenger vehicles are rated at 10% lower loadcarrying capacity due to the differences in vehicle usages.

*[DR31101(ALL)05/95] The vehicle must not be loaded to both the front and rearGAWR because the GVWR will be exceeded. The GAWR of thefront and rear axles exceeds the GVWR when added together toallow flexibility in fore and aft loading of cargo.

*[DR31110(ALL)06/92] With the tires inflated to the specified pressure the total weightof your vehicle must not exceed the GVWR and GAWRspecified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Thisincludes full fuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants aswell as the cargo load.



277

*[DR31120(ALL)06/92] GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

*[DR31130(ALL)06/92] GCWR is the maximum combined weight of the towingvehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer.The GCWR is specified by the manufacturer to indicate thecombined maximum loaded weight that the vehicle is designedto tow.

*[DR31140(ALL)06/92] Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

*[DR31150(ALL)05/95] The maximum trailer weight rating is the maximum weight of atrailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. It is specified by themanufacturer and is determined by subtracting the vehicle curbweight for each engine/transmission combination, any requiredoption weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driverfrom the GCWR for the towing vehicle.

*[DR31160(ALL)06/92] Maximum Trailer Weight

*[DR31170(ALL)05/95] The maximum trailer weight is the maximum weight of a trailerthe loaded vehicle is permitted to tow. It is determined bysubtracting the weight of the loaded towing vehicle (includingpassengers and cargo) from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.

*[DR31180(ALL)06/92] Trailer Weight Range

*[DR31190(ALL)06/92] The trailer weight range is a specified range by weight, whichthe trailer must fall within, ranging from zero to the maximumtrailer weight rating.

%*[DR31301(ALL)03/91] Calculating The Load

*[DR31350(ALL)03/91] To know how much weight your vehicle can carry:

*[DR31401(ALL)12/91] ■ Obtain ratings from your Safety Compliance CertificationLabel, and the Trailer towing specifications in the ownerguide (refer to the Index)

*[DR31450(ALL)07/95] — Refer to the following sample illustration to locate thevarious ratings on your Safety Compliance CertificationLabel.


278

*[DR31501(ALL)03/91] — If you do not plan on pulling a trailer, do not includethese ratings into your calculations.

*[DR31550(ALL)08/95] ■ Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle(without cargo).

*[DR31601(ALL)03/91] ■ Subtract the total weight of passengers, driver and optionalequipment added by the factory, dealer or aftermarketsupplier to determine how much cargo weight you can carry.

[DR31650(ALL)04/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021184-ASample label

*[DR31702(ALL)03/91] If you suspect that your payload is excessive, have your vehicleweighed at a highway weigh station or appropriate commercialfacility. Weigh the total vehicle and trailer (if applicable), thenseparately weigh the vehicle at the front and rear wheels. Andfinally, weigh the trailer separately if applicable.



279

*[DR31751(ALL)03/91] Use this chart to perform your calculations.

[DR31831( X)03/95]

twenty-six pica

chart:0090123-A

*[DR31851(ALL)03/91] NOTE: The Truck Safety Compliance Certification Label hastwo weight related entries that sometimes causeconfusion.


280

*[DR31901(ALL)08/95] Front Axle Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): If this value isgiven as 83 pounds (38 kgs) on the label, does this mean thatyou are limited to adding only 83 pounds (38 kgs) ofaccessories to the front end capacity? Not exactly. This says thatyou can load 83 pounds (38 kgs) of options on the front axle,add 150 pound (68 kgs) passengers to all seating positions, andadd evenly distributed cargo in the box without exceeding theGAWR F.

*[DR31950(ALL)06/92] It is possible to hang heavier equipment on the front as long asthe vehicle owner/operator compensates. This can beaccomplished, if necessary, by carrying fewer passengers, lesscargo or positioning cargo more toward the rear, which has theeffect of reducing the load on the front. Keep in mind that theGAWR F, GAWR R, nor the GVWR should ever be exceeded.

*[DR32001(ALL)08/95] Total Accessory Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): If, forexample, this value is given as 112 pounds (51 kgs), does thismean that you are limited to adding 112 pounds (51 kgs) ofaccessories to your vehicle? Not exactly. This is a number that isrelated to government crash test standards, and only indirectlyreflects on the amount of accessory weight that can be carried.

*[DR32050(ALL)06/94] In the case of both these numbers (83 and 112 pounds) (38 and51 kgs), the important thing to remember is that for safeoperation, an owner/operator should calculate the amount andthe distribution of all weights (passengers, accessory equipmentand cargo). These combined weights should fall below thevehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.

*[DR32201(ALL)01/93] Trailers

*[DR32251(ALL)10/94] Towing a trailer safely means having the proper weight on thetongue (usually 10% of the trailer weight). Load-equalizinghitches on large rigs may transfer weight to each of the vehicle’saxles. This weight must be included in capacity calculationswhen determining if the vehicle is loaded within safe limits.



281

*[DR32301(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from yourvehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR foreither axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly.


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehiclemay be damaged or you may lose control and injuresomeone.


Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommendedgross trailer weight could result in engine damage,transmission/axle damage, structural damage, loss ofcontrol, and personal injury.

*[DR32450(ALL)05/95] Use the Safety Compliance Certification Label to find the axlecode number and the engine type for your vehicle.

*[DR32500(ALL)03/91] Use the appropriate Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) chart to find the Maximum GCWR for your typeengine and rear axle ratio.

*[DR32551(ALL)03/91] Subtract your Loaded Vehicle Weight from the MaximumGCWR found in the chart. This is the maximum trailer weightyour vehicle can tow and must fall below the maximum shownunder Trailer Weight on the chart.


282

[DR34025( X)04/94]

thirty pica

chart:0020645-E



283

[DR34060( X)10/94]

ten pica chart:0020641-C


284

*[DR34080( X)04/89] Manual Transmissions

[DR34150( X)06/94]

twenty-six pica

chart:0020642-G



285

[DR34165( X)10/94]

twenty-eight pica

chart:0020934-E


286

*[DR34180( X)06/94] Automatic Transmissions

[DR34250( X)06/95]

thirty pica

chart:0090209-A



287

[DR34275( X)10/94]

twenty-eight pica

chart:0020935-E


288

[DR34300( X)12/95]

20 pica

chart:0090217-A

*[DR36500(ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

*[DR36550(ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the rightequipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure thatall towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. Ifyou are not certain that you are using the right equipment inthe proper manner, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.



289

%*[DR36600(ALL)01/93] Hitches

*[DR36800(ALL)12/91] Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or ahitch which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitchesare acceptable if installed properly. Follow towing instructionsof a reputable rental agency.

*[DR37000(ALL)12/92] Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sureall mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed toprevent noxious gases or water from entering.

[DR37100( X)01/95] Trailer tow/step bumper

[DR37150( X)03/93] The rear bumper has an integral hitch and only requires a ballwith a 3/4 inch shank diameter. The bumper has a Class IIcapability (3500 lb/1590 kg trailer weight and 350 lb/159 kgtongue weight).

[DR37250( X)01/95] Use a frame mounted weight distributing hitch for trailers over3,500 lb. (1590 kg).

*[DR37550(ALL)03/91] NOTE: The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) fortrailer towing with the factory bumper are only validwhen the trailer hitch ball is installed directly into theball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry toeither lower the hitch ball position or extend the hitchball rearward will significantly increase the loads onthe bumper and its attachments. This can result in thefailure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Useof any type of hitch extensions should be consideredabuse.

*[DR37575(ALL)03/91] If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position aframe mounted trailer hitch must be installed.


290

%*[DR37800(ALL)07/95] Safety Chains

[DR37925( X)03/93] Located near the step bumper hitch ball position are two holesin the underside of the hitch plate for a Class II trailer (max).These holes may be used for safety chain attachment whentowing with the step bumper. Always use safety chains whentowing. Safety chains are used to retain connection between thetowing and towed vehicle in the event of separation of thetrailer coupling or ball. Cross the chains under the trailer tongueand allow slack for turning corners. Connect the chain to thehitch plate using a positive coupling, such as “Quick Links”,with a strength rating of at least that of the safety chain rating.

[DR37950( X)12/92] When using a frame mounted trailer hitch, do not attach thesafety chains to the step bumper. Attach the safety chains to theframe mounted hitch using the recommendations supplied bythe hitch manufacturer.

%*[DR38000(ALL)08/95] Trailer Brakes

*[DR38100(ALL)03/95] Separate trailer brakes are required on most towed vehiclesweighing over 1,500 lb (680 kg).


Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directlyto your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may nothave enough braking power and your chances of havinga collision greatly increase.

%*[DR38300(ALL)06/95] Trailer Lamps

*[DR38400(ALL)11/89] Make sure your trailer lamps conform to Federal and localregulations.

*[DR38425(ALL)03/91] Class I and Class II Trailer Tow electrical wiring provides twocircuits (right hand and left hand) to operate trailer stop/turntail lamps. Each stop/turn circuit will operate one combinationstop/turn light bulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357) on the trailer.Never add more than one trailer light bulb to one circuit.



291


Always replace a fuse with one that has the specifiedamperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperagerating can cause severe wire damage and could start afire.

*[DR38500(ALL)06/95] Driving while you tow

*[DR38520(ALL)05/95] Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer.Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow inhilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.

%*[DR38540(ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long,steep grades, the speed control may shut off.

[DR38600(ALL)12/95] When towing a trailer in hilly terrain, with a vehicle equippedwith a 4R44E/4R55E/4R70W transmission, you may wish tooperate in O/D OFF (3rd gear) rather than j (Overdrive). Thiswill eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting to maintainspeed. Shift back to j (Overdrive) whenever practical foroptimum powertrain cooling and fuel economy. This can beaccomplished by pushing in the transmission control switchwhich is located on the end of the gearshift lever.

*[DR38800(ALL)06/95] When descending a steep grade with a trailer, operate in Driverather than Overdrive. If additional braking is needed, shift theautomatic transmission gearshift into 2 (Second) gear or 1 (Low).


292

*[DR38925(ALL)08/95] Servicing Your Vehicle If You Tow

*[DR38950(ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will needto be serviced more frequently than usual. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additionalinformation.

[DR39000(ALL)08/95] Trailer towing tips

*[DR39100(ALL)11/89] Before starting on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backingin an area away from heavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” ofthe vehicle/trailer combination.

*[DR39200(ALL)05/90] Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, with someone outsideat the rear of your trailer to guide you. Place your hand at thebottom of the steering wheel and move it in the direction youwant the rear of the trailer to swing. Slight movement of thesteering wheel results in a much larger movement of the rear ofthe trailer.

*[DR39300(ALL)11/89] Allow more room for stopping with a trailer attached. Trailerbrakes should be applied first, whether manually orautomatically controlled, when approaching a stop.

*[DR39400(ALL)11/89] For a good handling truck-trailer combination, the trailer tongueload should be approximately 10-15% of the loaded trailerweight.

*[DR39500(ALL)05/95] Make a thorough check of your equipment before starting outon the road. After you have traveled about 50 miles (80 km)stop in a protected area and double-check your hitch andelectrical connections. Also check trailer wheel lug nuts fortightness.

*[DR39600(ALL)11/89] When turning, drive slightly beyond the normal turning pointso the trailer wheels will clear curbs or other obstructions.

[DR39750(ALL)01/95] When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather,place the gearshift selector lever in P (Park) to increase theengine idle speed. This aids in engine cooling and airconditioner efficiency. If the engine overheats, rotate thefunction selector control knob to panel position to stop thecompressor and increase the engine speed for a short time.



293

*[DR39900(ALL)05/90] Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.However, if you must park on a grade, place wheel chocksunder the trailer’s wheels as follows:

*[DR40000(ALL)05/95] ■ Apply the brake pedal and hold.

*[DR40100(ALL)11/89] ■ Have another person place the wheel chocks under thetrailer wheels.

*[DR40200(ALL)08/95] ■ With the chocks in place, release the brake pedal, makingsure the chocks are holding.

*[DR40300(ALL)03/91] ■ For automatic transmissions — apply the parking brake bypressing the service brake pedal down firmly with your rightfoot while applying the parking brake pedal with your leftfoot.

[DR40400(ALL)01/95] ■ For manual transmissions — apply the service brake andshift into N (Neutral) while still maintaining pressure on theservice brake pedal. Set the parking brake fully.

*[DR40500(ALL)12/91] ■ Shift an automatic transmission into Park (P). Put thegearshift of a manual transmission in Reverse. If your vehicleis equipped with four-wheel drive make sure the transfercase is not in Neutral.

*[DR40600(ALL)01/93] To start, after being parked on a grade:

*[DR40700(ALL)05/95] ■ Apply the brake pedal and hold.

*[DR40800(ALL)08/95] ■ Start the engine.

*[DR40900(ALL)08/95] ■ Shift transmission into gear and release the parking brake.

*[DR41000(ALL)08/95] ■ Release the brake pedal and move the vehicle uphill to freethe wheel chocks.

*[DR41100(ALL)05/95] ■ Apply the brake pedal and hold while another personretrieves the chocks.


294

[DR41235(ALL)02/92] Suspension Modifications[DR41250(ALL)03/91] The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been

designed and tested to provide both safe, predictableperformance (whether loaded or empty) as well as durable loadcarrying capability. Any modifications to the suspension orsteering systems can reduce your vehicle’s performancecapability and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Fordrecommends that you DO NOT make modifications such asadding or removing parts (like lift kits, stabilizer bars orsnowplowing equipment) or by using replacement partsnon-equivalent to the original factory equipment.

%*[DR41260(ALL)02/92] Snowplowing


Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.


295

Roadside Emergencies

%*[RE00400(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

*[RE00500(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or anyelectrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If thishappens, you may be able to jump-start your vehicle with abooster battery.

*[RE00600(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explode if exposed toflames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could resultin injury or vehicle damage.


To protect yourself when charging a battery, alwaysshield your face and eyes. Make sure that you canbreathe fresh air.

%*[RE00800(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting abattery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with acarrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE00900(ALL)07/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,and clothing.

*[RE00910(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. Ifsomeone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milkor water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetableoil. Call a doctor immediately.

File:12unrex.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996

296


Do not push-start your vehicle. You could damage thecatalytic converter. For further information, see JumperCables in the Index.


To avoid damage or injury, follow these directions in theorder they are given. If in doubt, call for road service.

*[RE01100(ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

*[RE01200(ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need touse a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your startingmotor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if youconnect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-voltbatteries in series or a 24-volt generator set).

*[RE01300(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

*[RE01400(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabledvehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Setthe parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.

*[RE01500(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessivecorrosion before you attach the jumper cables.

*[RE01600(ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Turning on the fanhelps protect the electrical system from voltage surges. Turnoff all other switches and lights in both vehicles to preventpossible damage to either vehicle’s electrical systems.



297

%*[RE01700(ALL)05/95] Connecting the jumper cables

*[RE01800(ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect eitherjumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you usethe same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumpercables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals and the black forthe negative ones.

*[RE01900(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+)terminal of the booster battery.

*[RE02000(ALL)07/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (s)terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the dischargedbattery.

*[RE02100(ALL)03/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to a good metallicsurface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. Thefollowing illustration shows where you can find a metallicsurface.


Do not connect the end of the second cable to thenegative (s) terminal of the battery to be jumped. Aspark may cause an explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.


298

[RE02300(ALL)08/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021186-BAttaching jumper cables

*[RE02500(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

*[RE02600(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way ofmoving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run theengine at a moderate speed.

*[RE02700(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and thenstart the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries beforethe vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after severalattempts, there may be a different problem.

*[RE02800(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a fewminutes to charge the discharged battery.

%*[RE02900(ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables

*[RE03000(ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order.Remove the negative (s) end of the jumper cable from themetallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[RE03100(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from the booster battery.

*[RE03200(ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery.



299

*[RE03400(ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from thedischarged battery.

*[RE03500(ALL)1/96] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let theengine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a whilewith all electrical accessories turned off to let the batteryrecharge. Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until all drivemodes are “relearned.” You may need to use a battery chargerto fully recharge the battery.

*[RE03525( X)01/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the ServicingYour Explorer chapter.

%*[RE03600(ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire

*[RE03700(ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply thebrake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold thesteering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, setthe parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers.

%*[RE03800(ALL)03/95] The Conventional Spare Tire

[RE03915( X)10/94] Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire,which you can use as a spare or as a regular tire. This spare tireis identical to the other tires that come with your vehicle,although the wheel may not match.



%*[RE04000(ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire

*[RE04100(ALL)03/95] You may have a high pressure temporary spare tire. This sparetire is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergencyuse only. Use it only when you get a flat tire and replace it assoon as you can. This spare tire is marked with the words“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you can easily identify it.


300

[RE04150(ALL)12/95] It is not recommended that vehicles equipped with 4WD beoperated in the 4WD modes with a temporary spare. If 4WDoperation is necessary, do not operate at speeds above 10 mph(16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km). Extendedoperation in 4WD with a temporary spare may result in damageto powertrain components.


If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or donot follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuringyourself or others.



*[RE04280(ALL)10/94] Extended use of other than matching size spare tires on aTraction-Lok axle could result in a permanent reduction ineffectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normaldriving and should not be noticeable to the driver.

*[RE04300(ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT:

*[RE04400(ALL)01/95] ■ exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances.

*[RE04500(ALL)01/95] ■ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than the maximumvehicle load rating listed on the tire decal.

*[RE04600(ALL)01/95] ■ tow a trailer.

*[RE04700(ALL)01/95] ■ use tire chains on this tire.

*[RE04800(ALL)01/95] ■ try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from itswheel.

*[RE04900(ALL)01/95] ■ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

[RE04950(ALL)10/94] ■ engage four-wheel drive on dry, hard-surfaced roads.



301

*[RE05000(ALL)01/95] ■ drive through an automatic car wash with this tire. Becausethe temporary spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire,it reduces the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caughtin the rails and it could be damaged.

%*[RE05100(ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location

*[RE05250(ALL)06/94] The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed at the rear under theframe.

*[RE05550( X)03/91] To remove the spare tire:

[RE05650( X)10/94] 1. Open the liftgate. Assemble the jack handle (stowed behindthe rear seats under the carpet) to the lug wrench (stowed indriver’s side rear quarter trim panel). Insert drive section ofthe handle into the actuator hole and turn counterclockwiseuntil the cable is slack enough to allow the spare tire to bepulled rearward from under the vehicle.

*[RE05700( X)10/94] 2. Slide the spare tire to the rear and remove the retainer fromthe wheel.

*[RE05850( X)10/94] 3. To stow the cable/retainer with spare removed, turn jackhandle wrench clockwise until slack is removed.

[RE05875( X)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021216-A

Assembling the jack handle


302

[RE05950( X)02/95]

27-1/2 pica art:0020558-F

The spare tire location and assembly

*[RE06050( X)03/91] To stow spare tire:

*[RE06150( X)10/94] 1. Insert the jack handle or lug nut wrench into the actuatorhole and turn counterclockwise until the cable/retainer isextended for insertion into the wheel.



303

*[RE06200( X)10/94] 2. Install the retainer through wheel center with valve stemfacing up.

*[RE06250( X)12/91] NOTE: Stow aluminum wheel and tire with valve stem down.

*[RE06350( X)10/94] 3. Rotate the handle clockwise to secure tire. Continue until thelift mechanism “slips”.

*[RE06400( X)03/91] 4. Check for proper seating against underbody supports andretighten if necessary.

[RE06500( X)10/94] 5. To stow the largest flat tire (P255 tire on a 16 inch trispokedwheel), place inside vehicle and secure with webbingretainer. Raise spare tire cable until secure.

[RE06600( X)10/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021217-AStowing largest flat tire


304

[RE14815( X)09/95] Explorer Limited 4x2/4x4


Make sure the spare tire and jacking equipment arestowed and secured in the proper storage location.

%*[RE15200(ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire

*[RE15250(ALL)12/91] NOTE: To lift your vehicle by other than the front or rearjacking points, be sure to use only hoist adapters witha wide contact surface.

*[RE15300(ALL)03/91] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. If youhave an automatic transmission, put the gearshift in Park. Ifyou have a manual transmission, put the gearshift inReverse. Set the parking brake and block the wheel that isdiagonally opposite the tire that you are changing.

*[RE15335(ALL)12/91] NOTE: Make sure the ignition is in the OFF position.

*[RE15390(ALL)05/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground, the transmissionalone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping offthe jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) or 1 (First). Toprevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, besure the parking brake is set, then block the wheel (bothdirections) that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of thevehicle) to the tire that is being changed.

[RE15400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could beseriously injured.

*[RE15550(ALL)03/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.

[RE16050( X)01/95] The jack is stowed behind the driver’s side, rear quarter trimpanel. Remove the quarter trim panel cover to get to it. The lugnut wrench is attached to the inside of the quarter trim panelcover. Stowed along with the jack is a jacking/tire changing



305

instruction sheet and a pair of tire changing gloves. The jackhandle is stowed behind the second row passenger seats underthe carpet. Assemble handle sections and lug wrench together.

[RE16075( X)02/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0021218-A

Assembling the jack handle

[RE16150( X)10/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0020559-CJack stowage area


306

[RE16250( X)01/95]

10-1/2 pica art:0020560-E

Jack handle location and installation (2-door model)

[RE16275( X)01/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021219-BJack handle location and installation (4-door model)

[RE16800(ALL)07/94] 3. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheelcovers or hubcaps and twist off.


Use only the lug nut wrench provided to remove wheelornaments. Not using the tapered end of the lug nutwrench at the pry-off notches may result in damage tothe finish of the wheel and ornament.



307


Not using the tapered end of the lug nut wrench at thepry-off notches may result in damage to the finish of thewheel and ornament.

*[RE16900(ALL)10/89] 4. Loosen the wheel nuts by pulling up on the handle of thelug nut wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Donot remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off theground.

*[RE17100(ALL)02/95] 5. Insert the jack handle into the jack and use the handle toslide the jack under the vehicle.



%*[RE17225(ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire

%*[RE17300(ALL)06/95] 1. Positioning the jack

[RE18175( X)06/94] a. To raise the front wheel, place the jack on the bracket orthe lower suspension arm.

[RE18251( X)08/91] b. To raise a rear tire, place the jack under the rear axleinboard of the spring shackle bolts.


308

[RE18350( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021220-AFront jacking position

[RE18401(ALL)06/94] c. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is amaximum of one inch off the ground.

[RE18601( X)06/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020603-DRear jacking position

[RE18650(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Do not use the differential housing as a lift point.



309

[RE21151(ALL)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021188-A


To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any partof your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Donot start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack.The jack is only meant for changing the tire.

*[RE21400(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.

*[RE21500(ALL)06/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

*[RE21700(ALL)06/95] 4. Thread the lug nuts on the wheel studs with the beveledface toward the wheel. Use the lug nut wrench to screw thelug nut snug against the wheel but do not tighten.

*[RE22200(ALL)01/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

*[RE22300(ALL)06/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the ordershown in the following illustration.


310

[RE22400(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021189-A

Lug nut tightening sequence


Use of wheels or lug nuts other than original equipmentcould cause damage to the wheel or mounting systemand allow the wheels to come off while the vehicle is inmotion.

*[RE23500(ALL)07/95] 7. Replace any wheel covers, ornaments, or hub caps that yourvehicle has. Make sure that they are screwed or snapped intoplace.

[RE23600(ALL)01/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. (Make sure jack issecurely fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.)

*[RE23700(ALL)06/95] 9. Unblock the wheels.

*[RE23800(ALL)06/93] Retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles(800 km) of new vehicle operation and at intervals specified inthe Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.

*[RE24200(ALL)10/89] Also retighten to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) ofoperation after any wheel change or any time the lug nuts areloosened.


Failure to retighten wheel lug nuts at mileages specifiedcould allow wheels to come off while the vehicle is inmotion.



311

[RE24345( X)04/94]

eight pica

chart:0020591-B

[RE24400(ALL)10/94] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch*[RE24500(ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a

collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have beentriggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuelpump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.

*[RE24600(ALL)07/95] For information on how to check and reset the fuel pumpshut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index.

%*[RE24700(ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle[RE24800(ALL)09/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional

towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistancecenter.

[RE24813( X)12/95] It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with wheel lift orflatbed equipment. Do not tow with slingbelt equipment. FordMotor Company has not developed or approved a T-hook orslingbelt towing procedure.


312

[RE24827( X)09/95]

three fourths page

art:0090197-B

*[RE24850(ALL)03/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind ofvehicle you have. A towing manual is available from FordMotor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Haveyour tow truck driver refer to this manual for the properhook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.



313

[RE27520( X)06/95] Neutral Tow Feature

[RE27540( X)06/95] Neutral tow feature is an option which can be activated at anydealership that has a Service Bay Diagnostic System (SBDS).When activated the feature may be enabled by following theinstruction located on the visor or the headliner.

[RE27560( X)12/95] The feature is available in vehicles with Control Trac andautomatic transmission only. It is not available on vehicles withAll-Wheel Drive.

[RE27580( X)06/95] There are no wrecker or recreational vehicle towing restrictionson method or distance if the above feature is activated andenabled.

[RE27590( X)06/95] See your dealer for more information.

[RE27600(ALL)12/91] Recreational Towing — All wheels on the ground

[RE27700(ALL)05/91] Towing your vehicle can be successfully performed by followingthe appropriate guidelines for the type of powertrain on thevehicle to be towed. The following guidelines, by powertraincombination, are designed to ensure that the transmission is notdamaged due to insufficient lubrication.

[RE27710( X)12/95] NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the All Wheel Drive transfercase cannot be towed with all four wheels on theground.

[RE27800(ALL)12/91] 4 x 2 — Automatic transmission

*[RE27900(ALL)03/95] ■ Release the parking brake.

[RE28000(ALL)01/95] ■ Place transmission gearshift in N (neutral).

[RE28100(ALL)10/94] ■ Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).

[RE28200(ALL)10/94] ■ Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).

[RE28300(ALL)06/94] If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or speed of 35 mph (56 km/h)will be exceeded, you must:


314

[RE28400(ALL)05/91] ■ Disconnect the driveshaft at the rear differential and properlysupport it under the vehicle.

[RE28500(ALL)01/95] ■ Mark the driveshaft and axle flanges to ensure properposition when reconnecting the driveshaft. Refer to servicemanual for proper driveshaft fastener torque specification.(See the Accessories chapter for information on orderingservice manuals.)


When disconnecting/installing the driveshaft, the parkingbrake must be set and the wheels blocked to ensure thevehicle does not roll.

[RE28700(ALL)06/94] ■ Maximum speed is 55 mph (88 km/h), unlimited distance.

[RE28720(ALL)12/91] 4 x 2 — Manual transmission


[RE28750(ALL)01/95] ■ Place the transmission gearshift in the neutral position.

[RE28770(ALL)12/91] ■ Maximum speed is limited by towing equipmentmanufacturer’s recommendation, unlimited distance.

[RE29450( X)10/94] CONTROL TRAC transfer case


[RE29600(ALL)01/95] ■ Place the transmission gearshift in the neutral position.

[RE29750( X)10/94] ■ Ensure the transfer case is in 2WD.

[RE29800(ALL)10/94] NOTE: Both the 4WD and 4WD Low indicator lights in theinstrument panel will be off when the 4WD switch isin 2WD.

[RE29850(ALL)10/92] For automatic transmissions:





315

[RE30100(ALL)06/94] If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or speed of 35 mph (56 km/h)will be exceeded, you must:

[RE30250( X)01/95] ■ Remove the rear driveshaft or have the neutral tow featureenabled at your dealership.

[RE30300(ALL)06/94] ■ Mark the driveshaft and transfer case/axle flanges to ensureproper position when installing the driveshaft. Refer toservice manual for proper driveshaft torque specification.


When disconnecting/installing the driveshaft, the parkingbrake must be set and the wheels blocked to ensure thevehicle does not roll.


[RE30525(ALL)10/92] For manual transmissions:


[RE30600(ALL)10/94] Limited vehicle operation, such as driving the vehicle while at acampsite, can be accomplished with the rear driveshaft removedby using the front drive to propel the vehicle. To operate thevehicle in this condition, you must follow the followingguidelines:

[RE30700(ALL)10/94] ■ Place the transfer case in 4WD by rotating 4WD switch to4WD HIGH.

[RE30800(ALL)10/94] ■ Drive the vehicle only on good surface roads to avoidexcessive loads on the front-wheel drive system.



[RE31100(ALL)10/94] ■ Avoid quick acceleration and steep grades.


316

[RE31200(ALL)10/94] To return the vehicle to a towable condition, you must:

[RE31300(ALL)10/94] ■ Place the transfer case in 2WD by rotating the 4WD switchto 2WD.

[RE31400(ALL)10/94] NOTE: Both the 4WD and 4WD Low indicator lights in theinstrument cluster will be off when the transfer caseis in 2WD.

[RE31500(ALL)10/94] ■ After 2WD is selected, the front hubs must be “unlocked” bymoving the vehicle in reverse direction for a minimum of tenfeet.

[RE31600(ALL)10/94] ■ Confirm the front hubs are unlocked by inspecting the frontdrive shaft to verify it does not turn when the vehicle istowed.

[RE31700(ALL)10/94] In addition to the above guidelines, it is recommended that youfollow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of thetowing apparatus.


317

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210(ALL)10/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-weekhotline with trained operators who put you in touch with thehelp you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to you throughout yourwarranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km),whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistancecoverages beyond this period (available through Ford Auto Clubin the United States or Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers inCanada), contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.Additional Roadside Assistance coverage is unavailable inPuerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.

*[HS00215(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220(ALL)06/94] ■ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225(ALL)06/94] ■ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230(ALL)06/94] ■ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235(ALL)06/94] ■ Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240(ALL)06/94] ■ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warrantyrelated tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow,are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towingand repossession).

*[HS00245(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250(ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in theOwner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Completethe card and place it in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United States call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself,Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. Toobtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (inCanada call 1-800-665-2006).

File:13unhsx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996

318

*[HS00300(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400(ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercurydealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chaptertells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle.

%*[HS00525(ALL)02/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada)

*[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealerwho wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may,however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be ableto resolve your concern.

*[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you received from yourdealership’s service department, talk to the service manager atthe dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to the owneror general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you willhave your concern resolved at this level.

*[HS01000(ALL)04/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to beserviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you,contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help you.

*[HS01010(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contactingFord Customer Assistance:

*[HS01020(ALL)04/95] ■ your telephone number (both business and home)

*[HS01030(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership islocated

*[HS01040(ALL)03/95] ■ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01050(ALL)03/95] ■ the date purchased

*[HS01060(ALL)03/95] ■ the current mileage on your vehicle

%*[HS01070(ALL)09/95] ■ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on yourowner card and/or your vehicle ownership license


Customer Assistance

319

*[HS01105(ALL)03/95] In the United States, contact:

[HS01120(ALL)01/95]


[HS01130(ALL)03/95] In Canada, contact:

[HS01135(ALL)05/95]


[HS01160(ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wishto contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only).

%*[HS02300(ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only)

*[HS02400(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independentdispute-settlement program available free to owners or lesseesof qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS02500(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states.Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue thisprocess at any time without notice and without incurringobligations.


320

*[HS02600(ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board Review?

[HS02700(ALL)09/95] The Board reviews unresolved warranty performance complaintson Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury LightTrucks under warranty that have not been resolved by a dealeror Ford Motor Company, except those involving:

*[HS02800(ALL)01/95] ■ A non-Ford product

*[HS02900(ALL)01/95] ■ A non-Ford dealership

*[HS03100(ALL)01/95] ■ A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200(ALL)01/95] ■ A request for reimbursement of consequential expensesunless incidental to a service or product complaint beingreviewed

*[HS03300(ALL)01/95] ■ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400(ALL)01/95] ■ Alleged liability claims

*[HS03450(ALL)01/95] ■ Property damage where such damage is significant whencompared to the economic loss alleged under the warrantydispute

*[HS03500(ALL)01/95] ■ Cases currently in litigation

*[HS03600(ALL)01/95] ■ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, family, orhousehold purposes

*[HS03650(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicableexpress written new vehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibilitymay differ according to state law. For example, see theunique brochure for California purchasers/lessees.


Customer Assistance

321

*[HS03700(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS03800(ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS03900(ALL)04/95] ■ three consumer representatives

*[HS04000(ALL)04/95] ■ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS04200(ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited andtrained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosenbecause of their business leadership qualities.

*[HS04300(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles ofthe date of delivery (warranty start date), you have a right tomake an oral presentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oral presentations may berequested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board bysimple majority vote.

*[HS04350(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials related to eachcomplaint and, based on the available information, arrive at afair and impartial decision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made by each of theinvolved parties.

*[HS04400(ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some caseswill take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board willmake every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.

*[HS04500(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you itsdecision in writing. It will also provide you with a form toindicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, butcustomers may have other options available to them under stateor federal law.

*[HS04600(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced intoevidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that maybe initiated.


322

*[HS04700(ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

*[HS04800(ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address to request abrochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and aone-page customer application form. The form should becompleted and mailed to the same address.

*[HS04900(ALL)09/93]


*[HS05100(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

*[HS05200(ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to beeligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the filenumber assigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and Ford MotorCompany representative are asked to submit statements.

*[HS05300(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs the followinginformation:

*[HS05400(ALL)04/95] ■ legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repairorders that relate to the case

*[HS05500(ALL)08/95] ■ the year, make, model, and vehicle identification number(VIN)

*[HS05600(ALL)04/95] ■ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700(ALL)04/95] ■ the date of repair and the mileage at the time of repair

*[HS05800(ALL)04/95] ■ the current mileage

*[HS05900(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer who sold you the vehicle or whoserviced your vehicle


Customer Assistance

323

*[HS06000(ALL)04/95] ■ a brief description of your unresolved complaint

*[HS06100(ALL)05/95] ■ a brief summary of actions that were taken with the dealerand Ford Motor Company

*[HS06200(ALL)05/95] ■ the names (if known) of all people you contacted at thedealership

*[HS06300(ALL)04/95] ■ a description of the action you want done to resolve yourconcern.

*[HS06305(ALL)07/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanationwill be mailed to you.

%*[HS06307(ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)

*[HS06308(ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.

*[HS06309(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.

*[HS06311(ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.


324

%*[HS06315(ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer Assistance

*[HS06320(ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

*[HS06325(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns thatthe dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer AssistanceCentre.

*[HS06326(ALL)06/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0050104-B

*[HS06327(ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contactingthe Customer Assistance Centre:

*[HS06328(ALL)04/95] ■ your telephone number (both business and home)

*[HS06329(ALL)04/95] ■ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on yourowner card and/or your vehicle ownership license.

*[HS06330(ALL)03/95] ■ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS06331(ALL)03/95] ■ the date purchased

*[HS06332(ALL)04/95] ■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership islocated

*[HS06333(ALL)04/95] ■ the current mileage on your vehicle.


Customer Assistance

325

*[HS06335(ALL)09/95] Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada only)

*[HS06340(ALL)09/95] In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts byFord and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle serviceconcern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates inan impartial third party mediation/arbitration programadministered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP).

*[HS06345(ALL)09/95] The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relativelyspeedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all otherefforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure iswithout cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need forlengthy and expensive legal proceedings.

*[HS06350(ALL)09/95] In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party Arbitratorsconduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in aninformal environment. These impartial Arbitrators review thepositions of the parties, make decisions and, where appropriate,render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast,fair and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both youand Ford of Canada.

*[HS06355(ALL)09/95] CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces,except Quebec. For more information, without charge orobligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directlyat 1-800-207-0685.

%*[HS06400(ALL)06/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada*[HS06500(ALL)06/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the

appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure localregulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether youshould import your vehicle to that country.

*[HS06600(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to getunleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get onlyfuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations office before youleave the U.S. or Canada.


326

*[HS06700(ALL)06/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversionmay damage the effectiveness of your emissions control systemand may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for any damage that iscaused by use of improper fuel.

*[HS06800(ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back intothe U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS06900(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling orliving in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or theMiddle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If thedealership cannot help you, write to:

[HS07000(ALL)05/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0040273-C

*[HS07100(ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Forddealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can directyou to the appropriate Ford affiliate office.

*[HS07200(ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocateoutside of the U.S. or Canada, register your VehicleIdentification Number and new address with Ford MotorCompany Export Operations.


327

Accessories

*[AC00400(ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[AC00425(ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to cleanyour vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use thefollowing, or products of equivalent quality:

*[AC00450(ALL)05/95]

twelve pica

chart:0032382-A

*[AC00500(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is available through your localauthorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineeredspecifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style and aerodynamic appearanceof your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is madefrom high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigidengineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brandaccessories are warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for completewarranty information and accessory availability.

File:14unacx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:16:06 1996

328

*[AC00600(ALL)06/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

[AC01225( X)07/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0090144-B


Accessories

329

*[AC01900(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, andluggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the totalweight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rearaxle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label). Consult your dealerfor specific weight information.

*[AC02000(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) orthe Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulates the use of mobile communicationssystems — such as two-way radios, telephones, andtheft alarms — that are equipped with radiotransmitters. Any such equipment installed in yourvehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulationsand should be installed only by a qualified technician.

*[AC02100(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm theoperation of your vehicle, particularly if they are notproperly designed for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, when operated, suchsystems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. Inaddition, such systems may themselves be damaged ortheir operation affected by operating your vehicle.(Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose power output is 5 wattsor less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC02200(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation,design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannotassume responsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use this equipment.


330

[AC02500( X)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0090199-A


Accessories

331

[AC02600( X)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0090200-A


332

[AC02700( X)05/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0090201-A


333

Servicing Your Explorer

%*[SV00300(ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

*[SV00400(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV00500(ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to beserviced.

*[SV00600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible.To help you:

*[SV00700(ALL)01/95] ■ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in the enginecompartment so that you can find them easily.

*[SV00800(ALL)01/95] ■ When possible, we design parts — such as the headlampbulbs — that can be replaced without tools.

*[SV00900(ALL)05/94] ■ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that makes trackingroutine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenanceschedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet.

*[SV01000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need tocheck and service regularly.

*[SV01050(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership canprovide the parts and service required. Check your WarrantyInformation Booklet to find out which parts and services arecovered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this OwnerGuide.

*[SV01300(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that the Owner MaintenanceChecks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet beperformed for the proper operation of your vehicle. In additionto the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, bealert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication thatyour vehicle may need service. If you do notice somethingunusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly.

File:15unsvx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996

334

%*[SV01400(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sstandards for disposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find out about recyclingautomotive fluids.

%*[SV01600(ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle

*[SV01700(ALL)06/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.Here are some general precautions for your safety:

*[SV01900(ALL)06/95] ■ If you must work with the engine running, avoid wearingloose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in movingparts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair.

*[SV02000(ALL)06/95] ■ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed space with theengine running, unless you are sure you have enoughventilation.

*[SV02100(ALL)08/95] ■ Never get under a vehicle while it is supported only by ajack. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02200(ALL)06/95] ■ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking materials awayfrom the battery and all fuel-related parts.

*[SV02500(ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idleconditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To find outhow the engine does this, see Battery in this chapter.

*[SV02600(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off:

*[SV02660(ALL)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshiftis securely latched in P (Park).

*[SV02700(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you turn the engineoff.

*[SV02725(ALL)06/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle frommoving unexpectedly.



335

*[SV02750(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on:

[SV02775(ALL)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully, and make sure the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission) and block the wheels.

*[SV02825(ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle frommoving unexpectedly.

*[SV02900(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removedand do not remove it while the engine is running.

%*[SV02950(ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood

[SV03035(ALL)12/91] 1. Pull the hood release handle, located below the steeringcolumn.

[SV03040(ALL)01/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0020332-B

Hood release handle

*[SV03050( X)12/91] 2. While applying downward pressure on the hood, push thehood latch handle located behind the grille near the centerfront of the vehicle to the left.


336

[SV03750( X)02/95]

17-1/2 pica

art:0020555-GHood

*[SV03775(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Read and understand Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter beforeopening the hood.

[SV03850( X)08/94] Close the hood with enough force to make it latch. Be sure tooil the hood latch every six months to maintain smoothoperation.

*[SV03900(ALL)05/90] Always attempt to lift the hood after closing to be sure it issecurely latched.

%*[SV04500(ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment[SV04875( X)03/95] Your Explorer has either a 4.0 Liter EFI, V-6 engine or a 5.0

Liter EFI, V-8 engine.

[SV05505( X)10/92] The following page shows a diagram of the engine and whereto find items that you should regularly service.


Servicing

Your

Explorer337

[SV

05

62

5(A

LL)03

/95

]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

90

15

3-A

4.0Lengine

compartm

entservice

points

File:15unsvx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996

338

[SV

05

65

0(

X)0

9/9

5]

fullpage

art:0090135-C

5.0Lengine

compartm

entservice

File:15unsvx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996


339

%*[SV05660(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine

*[SV05665(ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because a buildup of grease anddirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than usual.

*[SV05670(ALL)07/95] ■ Extreme care must be used if a power washer is used toclean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetratesealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

*[SV05675(ALL)08/95] ■ In order to avoid possible cracking of the engine block orfuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injectionpump with cold water.

[SV05680(ALL)03/95] ■ The alternator, coils and air intake must be covered.Covering these components will help prevent water damage.

*[SV05685(ALL)04/95] ■ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running. Watergetting into the engine may cause internal damage.

%*[SV06100(ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank[SV06375( X)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020556-CFuel filler door


340

%*[SV06550(ALL)02/91] Opening the Fuel Filler Door

*[SV06600(ALL)10/94] To open the fuel filler door of your vehicle, just insert yourfinger in the divot and pull the door open all the way.

*[SV06610(ALL)02/95] Filling the fuel tank


Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in anoverfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel sprayand fire.

*[SV06630(ALL)01/95] To fill the fuel tank properly:

*[SV06640(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Extinguish all lit cigarettes, other smoking materials,and any open flames before fueling your vehicle.

[SV06800(ALL)08/94] 1. Unscrew the fuel cap by exerting pressure on the plastic lockbar and rotating the fuel cap counterclockwise.

[SV06850(ALL)08/94] 2. Turn the fuel cap 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn until a hissing soundis heard. Wait until the hissing sound stops and thencontinue rotating counterclockwise to remove the fuel cap.

[SV06900(ALL)01/95] Make sure that you follow the above fuel cap removalinstructions and use caution. Such caution will minimize thepossibility of fuel spraying during removal of the fuel cap.

[SV06910(ALL)01/95] 3. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel and put the nozzleall the way inside the fuel filler pipe.

[SV06920(ALL)01/95] If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle, clean it offimmediately. The fuel may dull or soften the paint if you donot wash it off.

*[SV06950(ALL)03/91] To replace and secure the fuel cap; place it in position androtate it clockwise until it clicks (ratchets). Doing so will notdamage or break the fuel cap. The ratcheting mechanism allowsthe fuel cap to be sealed without overtightening.



341

*[SV06990(ALL)07/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an authorized Motorcraftor equivalent part.

%*[SV07000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in thefuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to workimproperly in a collision.

*[SV07025(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuelfiller cap, the customer warranty may be void for anydamage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.


If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissingsound, wait until it stops before completely removing thecap.

*[SV07055(ALL)01/95] You may occasionally hear and/or feel a slight thump occurringone or two seconds after a gentle stop. This is normal andgenerally occurs with the fuel tank 3/4 full. It is caused by thewave action of the fuel within the tank.

*[SV07060(ALL)11/89] A venting fuel tank is not an abnormal condition. It may becaused by:

[SV07061(ALL)07/95] ■ Too volatile a fuel for the weather conditions. The servicestations sometimes sell winter grade fuel in the spring.

*[SV07062(ALL)11/89] ■ Pulling a heavy load on hot days, or at high altitudes.

*[SV07063(ALL)11/89] ■ Extended periods of idling with the engine RPM increasedabove the normal idle range.

*[SV07064(ALL)11/89] ■ Parking vehicle in full sunlight for extended periods onextremely hot days.


342

%*[SV07500(ALL)06/95] Choosing the Right Fuel

*[SV07600(ALL)06/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle. Using leaded fuelis prohibited by federal law. Your warranty may not apply ifyour vehicle is damaged because you used the wrong fuel.

*[SV07650(ALL)08/95] Vehicle inspection programs may detect misfueling. Under thesecircumstances, you may be required by law to make costlyrepairs at your own expense.

%*[SV07700(ALL)05/95] Octane Recommendations

*[SV07750(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle is designed to use regular fuel with an octanerating of 87. In most cases it is not necessary to use a fuel withan octane rating higher than 87. At service stations, the octanerating is displayed in a label on the pumps.

*[SV07775(ALL)06/95]

one inch art:0060001-C

Typical octane rating label

*[SV07800(ALL)07/95] In some parts of the country, “regular” grade fuels are soldwith octane ratings of 86 or even less, especially in high altitudeareas. We recommend that you do not use these fuels. Alwaysuse a fuel with an octane rating of 87, even if it is sold as a“midgrade” or “premium.”

*[SV07850(ALL)04/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightlywhen you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. However, if afuel with the recommended octane rating knocks heavily underall driving conditions or knocks lightly driving at cruising speedon level roads, see your dealer or a qualified service technician.Persistent, heavy knocking can damage the engine.



343

*[SV07900(ALL)04/95] In some parts of the country, “premium” grade fuels are soldwith octane ratings of less than 91, especially in high altitudeareas. It is recommended that you use only those “premium”fuels with an octane rating of 91 or higher.

*[SV07950(ALL)02/95] Fuel Quality

*[SV08000(ALL)06/95] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitationproblems when the engine is cold, it may be caused by fuelwith low volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If thecondition persists, see your dealer or a qualified servicetechnician.

*[SV08050(ALL)09/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle more responsiveand maintains its good fuel economy and emissions by:

*[SV08100(ALL)04/95] ■ minimizing deposits in fuel injectors, combustion chambersand on intake valves.

*[SV08150(ALL)08/95] ■ assuring quick starting and smooth warm-up.

*[SV08200(ALL)08/95] ■ protecting the fuel system from vapor lock in very hotweather, which causes the engine to hesitate or stall andmakes restarts difficult.

*[SV08250(ALL)08/95] ■ protecting your fuel system from rusting.

*[SV08300(ALL)08/95] ■ preventing the fuel lines from freezing.

*[SV08350(ALL)06/95] ■ preventing the fuel system from “gumming up” when yourvehicle is not used for long periods of time.

*[SV08400(ALL)06/95] It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products toyour fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel.


344

[SV08450(ALL)06/95] Gasolines For Clean Air

%*[SV08500(ALL)04/95] Fuels in certain areas of the country are required to containoxygenates to improve air quality. Common oxygenates areethanol or grain alcohol (blended at no more than 10%),methanol or wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% withcosolvents and additives) and MTBE or methyl tertiary butylether (blended at no more than 15%).

*[SV08550(ALL)02/95] Reformulated gasoline is also required in certain areas of theU.S. These fuels are designed to further reduce emissions fromyour vehicle.

*[SV08600(ALL)04/95] Generally, you should not experience difficulties operating yourvehicle on reformulated gasoline or on fuels containingoxygenates. We encourage you to use these fuels.

%*[SV10185(ALL)06/95] Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels


Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death ifmisused or mishandled.

*[SV10200(ALL)08/95] Gasoline and other automotive fuels are extremely flammable.Turn your vehicle off and do not smoke while refueling yourvehicle. Keep sparks and other sources of ignition away fromfuels.

*[SV10205(ALL)05/95] Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Further,gasoline may be blended with methanol. Even small amounts ofmethanol can cause blindness and possibly death whenswallowed. Therefore, never attempt to siphon any fuel bymouth.

*[SV10210(ALL)08/95] If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison controlcenter immediately. Do not delay calling a physician merelybecause no adverse effects are noticed at first; the toxic effectsof fuels may not become apparent for many hours.



345

*[SV10213(ALL)08/95] If gasoline is swallowed, do not induce vomiting. If agasoline-methanol blend is swallowed, induce vomiting underthe direction of a physician or poison control center.

*[SV10215(ALL)03/95] Gasoline and gasoline-methanol blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure tounleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Further, excessive inhalation of fuel vapors can causeheadache, dizziness, nausea, loss of coordination, and othersymptoms which could interfere with your ability to safelyoperate your vehicle. To the extent possible, avoid breathingvapors while refueling. If fuel vapors are inhaled in excessivequantities, move the victim to fresh air and seek medicalattention.

*[SV10220(ALL)08/95] Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. Whenrefueling, be careful not to splash fuel on yourself or yourclothing. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly removecontaminated clothing and wash the skin thoroughly with soapand water.

*[SV10225(ALL)08/95] Fuels can cause severe eye irritation and possibly eye damage. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn),flush with large amounts of water for 15 minutes, and seekmedical attention.

*[SV10230(ALL)08/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms ofdisulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism, vapor or skin contactwith a gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same kind ofadverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitiveindividuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result.Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adversereaction.


346

%*[SV11300(ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

*[SV11400(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop on level groundaway from traffic. Add at least two gallons (8 liters) of fuel tostart your vehicle again. If your vehicle is not on level ground,you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters) of fuel to startit.

*[SV11500(ALL)07/95] You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuelsystem starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine.

%*[SV11600(ALL)05/95] Fuel Economy

*[SV11700(ALL)07/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicleand can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per100 Kilometers (L/100K).

*[SV11800(ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:

*[SV11900(ALL)06/95] 1. Fill the tank completely and record the initial odometerreading.

*[SV12000(ALL)06/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record the amount (in gallons orliters) purchased.

*[SV12200(ALL)07/95] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the fuel tank andrecord the final odometer reading.

[SV12210(ALL)09/95] 4. Divide the total number of miles that you have driven bythe total number of gallons that your vehicle has used. Inmetric, multiply the number of liters used by 100 and dividethe answer by the number of kilometers traveled. This willgive you the number of liters used per 100 km.



347

%*[SV12300(ALL)08/95] Comparisons With Environmental Protection Agency(EPA) and Transport Canada (TC) Fuel EconomyEstimates

*[SV12400(ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory testsunder simulated road conditions and may not reflect the actualconditions you experience or your style of driving. The EPAfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achievethe fuel economy shown.

%*[SV12500(ALL)08/95] Improving Fuel Economy

*[SV12625(ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is affected by a number of variables which canreduce efficiency. You can improve fuel economy byunderstanding these variables and minimizing their effect.

*[SV12650(ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:

*[SV12675(ALL)05/95] ■ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

*[SV12725(ALL)05/95] ■ Excessive speed

*[SV12750(ALL)05/95] ■ Rapid acceleration and excessive speed

*[SV12775(ALL)05/95] ■ Driving with your foot on the brake

*[SV12825(ALL)05/95] ■ Sudden stops

*[SV12850(ALL)05/95] ■ Extended engine idling

*[SV12875(ALL)05/95] ■ Using speed control in hilly terrain

*[SV12925(ALL)05/95] ■ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defrosterand other accessories

*[SV12950(ALL)05/95] ■ Underinflated tires

*[SV12975(ALL)05/95] ■ Heavy loads

*[SV13025(ALL)05/95] ■ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or luggage racks, bugdeflectors, etc.


348

%*[SV13600(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[SV13610(ALL)10/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oilmeeting Ford Specification WSS-M2C193-F and displaying theAmerican Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on thefront of the container.

*[SV13650(ALL)05/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0001314-AThe API Certification Mark

*[SV13670(ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV13680(ALL)01/95] ■ “Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV13690(ALL)04/95] ■ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV13700(ALL)01/95] ■ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or enginetreatments

%*[SV13710(ALL)06/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED foryour vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fueleconomy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV13725(ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferredviscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oilfilter must still be changed according to the maintenanceschedule.



349

%*[SV13775(ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV13800(ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safeengine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time youput fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, theoil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on levelground.

%*[SV13900(ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV14000(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a fewminutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV14050(ALL)06/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park) or 1 (manual transmission).

*[SV14100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

*[SV14200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) andcarefully pull it out of the engine.

*[SV14300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, makingsure it is fully seated.

[SV14400(ALL)10/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021256-B

Engine oil dipstick


350

[SV14425( X)12/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0090215-B

Engine oil dipstick — 5.0L engine

[SV14500(ALL)10/94] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is belowthe “ADD” line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oil levelis beyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damage or high oilconsumption may occur and some oil must be removed fromthe engine.

*[SV14600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated.

*[SV14800(ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Makesure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity.Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if enginedamage is caused by the use of improper engine oil.

*[SV15000(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow.To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oilinto the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheckthe oil level after you finish adding oil.



351

%*[SV16300(ALL)06/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter

[SV16350(ALL)03/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per the following, whicheveroccurs first:

[SV16375(ALL)03/95]

half page art:0090154-A

*[SV16400(ALL)03/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet foradditional information.

*[SV17150(ALL)09/95] NOTE: See Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts and LubricationSpecifications in this chapter for the appropriate oilfilter and engine oil refill quantity.



352


Continuous contact with USED motor oil has causedcancer in laboratory mice.

*[SV17285(ALL)07/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap and water.

%*[SV17300(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV17400(ALL)09/95] Checking the engine coolant

*[SV17500(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Precautions WhenServicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.

*[SV17700(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the engine fromoverheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter.Check the level of the engine coolant at least once a month, butpreferably each time you stop for fuel. Simply look at theengine coolant recovery reservoir located in the enginecompartment. To locate this reservoir, see the diagram of yourvehicle’s engine under Engine types in this chapter.

*[SV17750(ALL)03/95] If the engine coolant has not been checked for a long period oftime the engine coolant reservoir may eventually empty. If theengine coolant reservoir empties, check the engine coolant levelin the radiator. Read the following warnings before removingthe radiator cap. If it is necessary to fill the radiator, refer to theEngine Coolant Refill Procedure in this chapter for instructions.


Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engineis running or hot.

*[SV17765(ALL)09/95] 1. Before you remove the radiator cap, turn the engine off andlet it cool. Even when the engine is cool, be careful whenyou remove the radiator cap.

*[SV17770(ALL)09/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the capand turn it slowly counterclockwise to the first stop.



353

*[SV17779(ALL)09/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

*[SV17780(ALL)09/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released,use the cloth to turn and remove cap.

*[SV17785(ALL)09/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hot steam may blowout or hot engine coolant may even splash out.

[SV17950(ALL)09/95] Adding engine coolant

[SV18250(ALL)05/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090119-BAdding engine coolant

[SV20075(ALL)09/95] RWARNING

Be careful not to add engine coolant to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield,engine coolant could make it difficult to see through thewindshield.

[SV20100(ALL)09/95] When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolantand water to the engine coolant recovery reservoir — DO NOTADD DIRECTLY TO THE RADIATOR. Add straight water onlyin an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50mixture of coolant and distilled water as soon as possible.


354

[SV20125(ALL)09/95] Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir thenext few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enoughof a 50/50 mixture of coolant and water to bring the liquidlevel to the fill line on the reservoir.


Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engineis running or hot.

[SV20175(ALL)09/95] If you must remove the coolant recovery cap, follow these stepsto avoid personal injury caused by escaping steam or enginecoolant:

[SV20200(ALL)09/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let itcool.

[SV20225(ALL)09/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the capand turn it slowly, counterclockwise to the first stop.

[SV20250(ALL)09/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

[SV20275(ALL)09/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released,use the cloth to press the cap down, turn it counterclockwise,and remove it.

[SV20295(ALL)09/95] Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada,Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or an equivalent premium engine coolantthat meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. Ford PremiumEngine Coolant is an optimized formula that will protect allmetals and rubber elastomers used in Ford cooling systems for 4years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km).

[SV20300(ALL)09/95] Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any enginecoolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Do not usesupplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. These additivesmay harm your engine cooling system. The use of an impropercoolant may void the warranty of your vehicle’s engine coolingsystem.



355

[SV20325(ALL)09/95] Recycled engine coolant

[SV20350(ALL)09/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled engine coolant producedby Ford-approved processes. Not all coolant recycling processesproduce coolant which meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A,and use of such coolant may harm engine and cooling systemcomponents.

[SV20375(ALL)09/95] Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsiblemanner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards forrecycling and disposing of automotive fluids.

[SV20400(ALL)09/95] Coolant refill capacity

[SV20425(ALL)09/95] To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system canhold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index.

[SV20450(ALL)09/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks ifyou have to add more than a quart (liter) of engine coolant permonth.

[SV20475(ALL)09/95] Severe winter climate

[SV20490(ALL)09/95] If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than -34˚F [-36˚C]),it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above50%. Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure thecoolant concentration in your vehicle is such that the coolantwill not freeze at the temperature level in which you driveduring winter months. Never increase the engine coolantconcentration above 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of enginecoolant and water in your vehicle year-round in non-extremeclimates.

%*[SV20500(ALL)08/95] Checking Hoses

*[SV20600(ALL)10/89] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses for deterioration,leaks and loose clamps before adding or replacing enginecoolant. Make whatever repairs or replacements that arenecessary using Motorcraft parts or their equivalents.


356

%*[SV20700(ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush

*[SV20800(ALL)10/89] To drain your vehicle’s engine coolant:

*[SV20900(ALL)03/94] 1. Turn off the engine and let it cool. Fully depressurize theengine cooling system by covering the radiator cap with athick cloth and turning it slowly counterclockwise to the firststop. Step back while the pressure releases.

*[SV20950(ALL)05/90] 2. Remove the cap.

*[SV21000(ALL)05/90] 3. Attach a small hose to the drain tube at the bottom of theradiator.

*[SV21200(ALL)05/90] 4. Let the engine coolant drain into a suitable container.Disconnect the lower radiator hose at the radiator connectorand drain any remaining engine coolant into a container.

*[SV21250(ALL)05/95] Proper procedures for flushing the cooling system can be foundin the Service Manual.

%*[SV21300(ALL)08/95] Engine coolant refill procedure

*[SV21400(ALL)10/89] After you have drained the engine cooling system:

[SV21700(ALL)10/89] 1. When cold, fill the radiator to a level 1 to 1 1/2 inches(38 mm) below the filler neck seat.

*[SV21900(ALL)03/94] 2. Replace the radiator cap to its fully installed position, thenback off to the first stop. This will prevent high pressurefrom building up in the cooling system during this part ofthe fill procedure.

*[SV22100(ALL)10/89] 3. Start and idle the engine until the thermostat opens and theradiator upper hose becomes warm.

*[SV22200(ALL)05/95] 4. Shut off the engine and allow the engine to cool. Cover theradiator cap with a thick cloth and cautiously remove it. Stepback while the pressure releases.



357

*[SV22500(ALL)10/89] 5. Finally, check the radiator and add more engine coolant ifneeded, following the procedures noted above. Reinstall theradiator cap securely, when finished.

*[SV22525(ALL)05/90] 6. If more engine coolant is necessary, fill the overflowreservoir to the appropriate level marked on the bottle.

*[SV22610( X)08/95] NOTE: Due to air being trapped in the 4.0L engine coolingsystem, it is not unusual to experience a 4 to 7 ounce(120 to 210 ml) coolant loss up to 7,500 miles(12,000 km) after initial system fill.

*[SV22620( X)06/95] In order to bleed the cooling system properly after initial fillwith coolant, it might need up to five cycles of:

*[SV22630( X)06/95] ■ heating up the system (thermostat open)

*[SV22640( X)06/95] ■ making sure coolant is at least up to the cold fill mark ofoverflow bottle

*[SV22650( X)06/95] ■ letting the coolant cool down (engine coolant temperaturegauge below the N of NORMAL)

*[SV22660( X)06/95] ■ topping off the coolant overflow bottle to the cold fillmark

*[SV22680( X)06/95] If coolant loss continues after 7,500 miles (12,000 km), consultyour Ford Dealer.


358

%*[SV22700(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers%*[SV22800(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

*[SV22900(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time youstop for fuel. The reservoir for washer fluid is located on thepassenger’s side of the engine compartment. Visual inspectioncan determine if the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operatethe washer when the reservoir is empty.


Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container forthe engine coolant.

[SV23550(ALL)09/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090119-BAdding windshield washer fluid

%*[SV23800(ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather thanplain water, because specially formulated washer fluids containadditives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanolshould be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F[0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze,methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreezeagents should be used only if they provide cold weather



359

protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiperblades, and windshield washer system.

*[SV23900(ALL)10/89] If you choose to use a windshield washing solution that mustbe mixed, follow the manufacturer’s mixing instructions.Improperly mixed solutions may freeze unexpectedly.


Windshield washer fluid contains methanol and it ispoisonous. Follow all instructions on the bottle of washerfluid.

*[SV24300( X)03/90] Checking/adding the washer fluid for the liftgate

[SV24425( X)03/93] Check the liftgate washer reservoir regularly. This is not thesame reservoir that your front windshield wipers use. Theopening for this reservoir is on the left side of the body abovethe tail lamp. A fill cup is located on top of the left hand taillamp and is accessible when the liftgate is open. Close the fillcup cover after filling and before closing the liftgate. Refill thisreservoir with the same solution you use for your windshield.To find out how much washer fluid the liftgate reservoir holds,see Refill capacities in the Index.

[SV24460( X)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0020557-CLiftgate window washer reservoir


360

%*[SV24500(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

*[SV24600(ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Alsocheck them whenever they seem less effective than usual. Suchsubstances as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.

*[SV24700(ALL)09/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshieldand the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solutionor a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do notuse fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean yourwiper blades. These will damage your blades.

*[SV24800(ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn theignition to the ACC position and turn your wipers on. Wait forthem to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to theOFF position. Do not move the wipers manually. Manuallymoving the wipers across the windshield may damage them.

*[SV24900(ALL)03/01] Wiper blade replacement

[SV25000(ALL)01/95] If the wipers still do not work properly after you clean them,you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or the blade.When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade refill, or wiperarm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent.

*[SV25025(ALL)10/93] To replace the wiper blades:

[SV25030(ALL)10/94] 1. Cycle windshield wiper arm and wiper blade to whereremoval of blade can be performed without difficulty. Turnignition off at desired position.

[SV25075(ALL)10/94] 2. To remove wiper blade assembly from wiper mounting arm,depress lock tab and push wiper mounting arm away fromwiper blade assembly.

[SV25100(ALL)10/94] 3. To install wiper blade assembly, pull wiper mounting armdown on wiper blade until lock tab is engaged.



361

[SV25125(ALL)10/94]

24 pica art:0021371-A

Replacing the wiper blades


362

%*[SV25200(ALL)03/95] Tires

*[SV25300(ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tirelooks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them.Always follow these precautions:

*[SV25400(ALL)03/95] ■ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures.

*[SV25500(ALL)02/95] ■ Stay within the recommended load limits (see Load limits inthe Index).

*[SV25600(ALL)02/95] ■ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly distributed.

*[SV25700(ALL)10/89] ■ Drive at safe speeds.

*[SV25800(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or goflat.

*[SV25890(ALL)07/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits.


Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility ofloss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds forextended periods of time may result in damage to vehiclecomponents.

*[SV26100(ALL)11/89] At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’stires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, that is, after thevehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has beendriven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can find the proper coldpressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.


Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling andcan fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehiclecontrol.



363

[SV26200(ALL)08/95] Tire inspection and maintenance

*[SV26300(ALL)02/95] Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails, glass or otherobjects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check forholes or cuts that may permit air to leak from the tire, andmake the necessary repairs.

*[SV26400(ALL)10/89] Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. Ifyou suspect internal damage to the tire, have it demounted andchecked. You may need to repair or replace it.

[SV26410(ALL)09/95] Wheel inspection and maintenance

*[SV26420(ALL)11/89] Check for damage that would affect the runout of the wheels.Wobble or shimmy will eventually damage the wheel bearings.

*[SV26430(ALL)06/93] Front wheel bearings require periodic repacking and adjustmentas specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.Loose or worn front wheel bearings tend to let the vehiclewander or shimmy, and can eventually cause excessive tirewear.

*[SV26435(ALL)06/95] Whenever a wheel is removed and then re-installed, alwaysremove any corrosion that may be present on the mountingsurface of the wheel and/or the surface of the hub, drum orrotor that contacts the wheel.


Installing wheels without a good metal-to-metal contact atthe wheel mounting surface can cause the wheel lug nutsto loosen and could allow the wheel to come off whilethe vehicle is in motion.

%*[SV26450(ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped)

*[SV26460(ALL)03/95] This axle provides added drive away traction on slipperysurfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surfacewith poor traction.


364



%*[SV26500(ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

*[SV26600(ALL)03/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform differentjobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wearevenly and last longer, rotate them at the mileage shown in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet which came with yourvehicle.

*[SV26700(ALL)07/92] Rotate the tires according to the following diagram. If younotice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. If yourlight truck has a temporary spare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation pattern.

*[SV26750(ALL)03/90] In situations where the tires differ from front to rear(snow/traction), simply rotate using a side to side pattern.



365

[SV26850( X)04/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021075-BTire rotation pattern

*[SV26900(ALL)10/89] After each rotation, adjust individual tire pressure as specifiedon the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Tighten wheel lugnuts to the required torque specification and retighten againafter 500 miles (800 km).

*[SV27000(ALL)08/95] If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, you may demount the fullsize, non-temporary spare tire (if so equipped) and remount onan aluminum wheel to rotate the spare tire into your vehicle’srotation pattern. Rebalance the wheel.

[SV27050( X)01/95] In addition to rotating the tires, the spare tire retention systemshould be cycled. Using the jack handle, lower the spare tire tothe ground and then proceed to raise the tire until themechanism “slips.” Refer to Spare Tire Location section of theRoadside Emergencies chapter for the operation of the spare tireretention system.


366

%*[SV27300(ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

*[SV27400(ALL)05/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire showsa wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left.

*[SV27500(ALL)11/93]

7-1/2 pica art:0040200-A

A worn-out tire

*[SV27600(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may needto replace them before a wear band appears across the entiretread. Some spots wear more heavily than others.

*[SV27700(ALL)03/90] Your wheels and tires are match-mounted for improved ride.Before you begin to repair a tire, mark the wheel and tire sothat they are properly aligned when remounted. This willensure that the tires will continue to give you the same ridelevel.


When replacing full size tires, never mix radial,bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes thatare listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that alltires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carryingcapacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended onthe decal. If you do not follow these precautions, yourvehicle may not drive properly and safely.



367


Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size,type, load-carrying capacity, and tread design (e.g. “AllTerrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.

[SV27876( X)06/94] RWARNING

Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires,or larger size tires. Do not use P235/75R15 “All Season”tires. P235/75R15 “All Terrain” tires are acceptable.


Do not use P255/70R16 tires on 2 door 4x2 model. TheP255/70R16 “All Terrain” tires are acceptable only on the2 door 4x4, 4 door 4x2, and 4 door 4x4 models.


Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affectthe handling of the vehicle and make it easier to losecontrol and roll over.

*[SV27900(ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tiresmay also affect the accuracy of your speedometer.


368

[SV28350( X)04/94]

27-1/2 pica

art:0020590-CTire identification chart


Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies may damage yourvehicle or cause accidents resulting in serious injuries.



369

%*[SV28800(ALL)04/95] Wheel and Tire Matching

*[SV28950(ALL)03/95] See an authorized tire dealer for proper servicing procedures.Wheels and tires must be properly removed, matched andremounted to maintain the best possible ride.

%*[SV31100(ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV31200(ALL)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads that providetraction in rain or snow. However, during the winter months insome climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.


Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tiresyou currently have on your vehicle.


Do not use chains on P255/70R16 tires on vehiclesequipped with automatic ride control.

*[SV31400(ALL)02/95] Do not use chains when using a temporary spare. For full sizetires, use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the lawrequires them where you live. When you use the tire chains:

*[SV31500(ALL)01/95] ■ Make sure the chains are the right size for your tires. Useonly SAE Class “S” chains. Other types may damage yourvehicle.

*[SV31525(ALL)08/93] ■ Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminum wheels. IT ISRECOMMENDED THAT TIRE CHAINS ARE INSTALLEDON STEEL WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheelcovers (if equipped) from steel rims before using tire chainsto avoid scratches or damage.

[SV31550(ALL)01/95] ■ Install tire chains on rear tires; use of chains on front tires isnot recommended.


370

[SV31575(ALL)01/95] ■ Local regulations may prohibit or restrict the use of tirechains. Investigate the laws and regulations in your areabefore installing chains.

*[SV31600(ALL)01/95] ■ Put the chains on tightly with the ends held down securely.Verify that no chain touches any wiring, brake lines, or fuellines. Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.

*[SV31700(ALL)01/95] ■ Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub or bang againstyour vehicle, stop the vehicle and tighten the chains. If youcontinue to hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle,remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.

*[SV31800(ALL)10/94] ■ Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.

*[SV31850(ALL)11/94] ■ Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive carefully andavoid hard braking.

[SV31900(ALL)03/95] Remove tire chains at the first opportunity after using them onsnow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads.

*[SV31950(ALL)05/91] ■ Make sure your suspension insulation and bumpers are notmissing or worn to avoid damage to your vehicle.

%*[SV31960(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV31970(ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash yourvehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover toremove grease and tar.

*[SV31975(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes areabrasive.

[SV31980(ALL)03/95] If you have raised white letter tires that are difficult to cleanwith regular detergent, use whitewall tire cleaner. Follow thedirections on the container and rinse the tires with plenty ofclean water.



371

%*[SV32100(ALL)03/95] Battery

*[SV32200(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery.The Motorcraft maintenance-free battery does not requireadditional water during its life of service. The vents are part ofthe cover and cannot be removed. For longer, trouble-freeoperation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, makecertain the battery cables are tightly fastened to the batteryterminals.

*[SV32300(ALL)02/95] If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or terminals,remove the cables from the terminal and clean them both with awire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution ofbaking soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you are donecleaning them, and apply a small quantity of grease to the topof each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion.

*[SV32400(ALL)07/95] Battery replacement

*[SV32500(ALL)02/95] If your original equipment battery requires replacement (underwarranty), it may in some cases be replaced by a Motorcraftlow-maintenance battery. The low-maintenance battery hasremovable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and foradding water, if needed.

[SV32550(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it isre-installed after the battery is replaced.

*[SV32600(ALL)07/95] Check your battery’s electrolyte level, at least every 12 monthsor 12,000 miles (20,000 km), in temperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C)and more often in temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep theelectrolyte in each cell up to the “level” indicator. Do notoverfill the battery cell.

*[SV32700(ALL)02/95] If the electrolyte level in your battery gets low, you can addplain tap water to the battery, as long as you don’t use hardwater, or water with a high mineral or alkali content. Ifpossible, however, try to only fill the battery cell with distilledwater. If the battery needs water often, have the chargingsystem checked.


372

%*[SV32725(ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV32750(ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acidbatteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility fordisposal.

*[SV32775(ALL)02/95]

7-1/2 pica art:0040201-A

Battery recycling symbol

%*[SV33000(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by acomputer, some control conditions are maintained by powerfrom the battery. If you ever disconnect the battery, install anew battery, or experience a dead battery, you must allow thecomputer to “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle willidle at its best. To let the engine do this, apply the parkingbrake, put the gearshift in Park (automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission), turn off all the accessories, andstart the vehicle. Let the engine idle for at least one minute.

*[SV33100(ALL)03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the idle quality ofyour vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle isrelearned. Your vehicle will eventually relearn its idle while youdrive it, but it takes much longer than if you use the previousprocedure.



373


Batteries normally produce explosive gases which cancause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,sparks or lit tobacco to come near the battery. Whencharging or working near a battery, always cover yourface and protect your eyes, and also provide ventilation.


Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,and clothing.

*[SV33310(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. Ifsomeone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milkor water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetableoil. Call a doctor immediately.


Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting abattery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with acarrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[SV33500(ALL)01/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[SV33601(ALL)06/95] Under normal driving conditions automatic transmission fluidshould be changed every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 21,000miles (34,000 km) if under severe duty conditions. However, ifthe transmission is not working properly, for instance, thetransmission may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice somesign of fluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked.

*[SV33701(ALL)05/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluid level at normaloperating temperature, after approximately 20 miles (30 km) ofdriving. However, if necessary, you can check the fluid level


374

without having to drive 20 miles to obtain a normal operatingtemperature if outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).

*[SV33801(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extendedperiod at high speeds or in city traffic during hotweather, or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should beturned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid tocool before checking.

%*[SV33901(ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[SV33910(ALL)06/95] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the engine and movethe transmission shift selector through all of the gear rangesallowing sufficient time for each position to engage. Securelylatch the transmission shift selector in the P (Park) position,fully set the parking brake and leave the engine running.


Your vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level isbelow the bottom hole on the dipstick and outsidetemperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).

*[SV33940(ALL)08/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap (located on the passenger’s side of theengine), pull the dipstick out and wipe the indicator end clean.Put the dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure it isfully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level.

*[SV33950(ALL)03/90] When checking fluid at normal operating temperature, the fluidlevel should be within the crosshatched area on the dipstick.When the vehicle has not been driven, and outside temperatureis above 50˚F (10˚C), the fluid level should be between the holeson the dipstick.



375

%*[SV33960(ALL)08/95] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[SV33970(ALL)03/94] The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. Before adding anyfluid, be sure that the correct type will be used.

*[SV33980(ALL)10/89] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through the filler tubeto bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. If anoverfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualifiedtechnician.


[SV34000(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021193-A

Automatic transmission dipstick


376

%*[SV34400(ALL)06/95] Manual Transmission and Transfer CaseFluid

*[SV34600(ALL)01/95] Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid

*[SV34700(ALL)12/91] Clean the filler plug on the side of the case. Remove the fillerplug. The fluid level should be up to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.

*[SV34800(ALL)03/91] If additional fluid is required:

*[SV34900(ALL)01/95] 1. Add enough fluid through the filler plug hole to bring thelevel up to the bottom of the hole. Use only fluid certified tomeet Ford Motor Company lubricant specification as listedunder Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and LubricantSpecifications, later in this chapter.

*[SV35000(ALL)03/91] 2. Replace the filler plug in its original position, making sure itis fully seated.

%*[SV35100(ALL)02/95] The Clutch

*[SV35200(ALL)03/91] The clutch on your vehicle is automatically self-adjusting andshould not require any routine service.

*[SV35301(ALL)03/91] During normal operation the fluid level in the clutch reservoirwill slowly rise. If for any reason the fluid level drops, maintainthe fluid level at the step in the reservoir body.

%*[SV35400(ALL)03/94] If it becomes necessary to remove the reservoir cap, thoroughlyclean the reservoir cap before removing it to prevent dirt orwater from entering the reservoir. Remove the internaldiaphragm and then add only a DOT 3 brake fluid such as FordHigh Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid, meeting Fordspecification ESA-M6C25-A.



377

[SV35500(ALL)10/94]

10-1/2 pica art:0020376-E

Clutch fluid reservoir

%*[SV35800(ALL)07/95] Driveline Universal Joint and Slip Yoke

*[SV36000(ALL)06/93] The universal joints that come standard with your vehicle donot require lubrication. If your original equipment universaljoints are replaced with universal joints equipped with greasefittings, lubrication will be necessary at the intervals shown inthe Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.

%*[SV36300(ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid

*[SV36350(ALL)05/90] Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid level indicator inthe master cylinder which lights the BRAKE warning light onthe instrument panel when the brake fluid level is low.

*[SV36400(ALL)03/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use upbrake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluidto slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and thebrake pads wear.

*[SV36500(ALL)08/95] Check the brake fluid at least once a year. You can do this bylooking at the fluid level in the plastic brake fluid reservoir onthe master cylinder. The fluid level should be at or near theMAX mark.


378


Brake fluid is toxic.

*[SV36560(ALL)07/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If takeninternally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.

*[SV36600(ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the cap from thereservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford HighPerformance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA,C6AZ-19542-BA, or equivalent DOT 3 fluid meeting Fordspecification ESA-M6C25-A.

*[SV36850(ALL)12/91] NOTE: If brake fluid is spilled on painted surfaces, it mustbe flushed and wiped away immediately. Brake fluidmay dissolve the paint finish on your vehicle.


If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you willcause permanent damage to your brakes.

*[SV37000(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

*[SV37100(ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below theseam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have thebrake system inspected.


Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry.This may cause the brakes to fail.



379

[SV37500(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0020382-C

Brake master cylinder

%*[SV37600(ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV37700(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice ayear (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

%*[SV37800(ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid

*[SV37900(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluidreaches normal operating temperature. The power steeringfluid will be at the right temperature when the enginecoolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is nearthe center of the NORMAL operating temperature range.

*[SV38000(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back andforth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly isinstalled at this time.

*[SV38100(ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.

%*[SV38200(ALL)03/94] 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which is highlighted inyellow in your vehicle). The fluid level should be betweenthe arrows in the FULL HOT range, which is marked on theside of the dipstick, opposite the side marked FULL COLD.Do not add fluid if the level is within the FULL HOT range.


380

[SV38250(ALL)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021195-APower steering dipstick

[SV38550(ALL)07/95]

10-1/2 pica

art:0090155-APower steering dipstick location

*[SV38800(ALL)07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in smallamounts, continuously checking the level, until you reach theFULL HOT range. Do not overfill.

*[SV38850(ALL)03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick back in and makesure that it fits snugly.

[SV38900(ALL)05/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford specification suchas MERCONH Automatic Transmission Fluid (or equivalent).



381

*[SV39200(ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle fora long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage thepower steering pump.

*[SV39400(ALL)02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it is cold, make surethat the fluid reaches the FULL COLD range on the dipstick.The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature isapproximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C).

*[SV39405(ALL)06/93] NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel of your vehicle withthe engine off. It could force power steering fluid outfrom the reservoir cap or in extreme cases, it couldunseat the cap.

%*[SV39495(ALL)03/95] Fuses[SV39600(ALL)03/95] Fuses protect your vehicle’s electrical system from overloading.

If electrical parts in your vehicle are not working, the systemmay have been overloaded and blown a fuse. Before youreplace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriatefuses.

[SV39700(ALL)07/94] The following charts tell you which fuses protect each electricalpart of your vehicle. If a fuse blows, all the parts of yourvehicle that use that circuit will not work.

*[SV39800(ALL)05/95] Once you have determined which fuses to check, follow theprocedures under Checking and replacing fuses later in thischapter.


382

[SV39900(ALL)10/94]

17-1/2 pica

art:0021207-BFuse panel (located left side of instrument panel)



383

[SV40250( X)10/94]

33-1/2 pica

art:0020562-MFuse panel (located under the left hand side of the instrument panel)


384

[SV40275( X)03/95]

thirty-four pica

chart:0090139-A



385

[SV40279( X)03/95]

thirty-four pica

chart:0090140-A


386

[SV41000( X)07/95]

eight pica

chart:0090158-A

%*[SV41300(ALL)06/95] Power distribution box

*[SV41400(ALL)10/92] The high current fuses contained in the Power Distribution Boxprotect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads;these fuses provide the connection between the battery and yourvehicle’s electrical systems.

*[SV41500(ALL)10/92] The high current fuses are coded as follows: 30 amp -lightgreen, 40 amp - orange, 50 amp - red, 60 amp -blue.


Always disconnect the battery before servicing highcurrent fuses.

*[SV41610(ALL)07/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses be replaced by aqualified technician.


Always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Boxbefore reconnecting the battery or refilling fluidreservoirs.

*[SV41800(ALL)04/95] A blown high current fuse may be replaced but will continue toblow until the cause of the overload condition is corrected.



387



[SV42125( X)02/96]

17-1/2 pica

art:0090142-CPower distribution box


388

%*[SV42200(ALL)06/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses

*[SV42300(ALL)02/95] If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:

[SV43000(ALL)01/95] 1. Find the fuse panel, which is located in the left end of theinstrument panel. The power distribution box (describedearlier in this section) is found in the engine compartment,mounted on a bracket attached to the left fender apron.

[SV43100(ALL)10/94] To access the fuse panel, remove the fuse panel cover byinserting your finger in the divot and pulling on the cover.The underside of the cover contains four spare fuses. A fusepulling tool is located in the lower right corner of the fusepanel in case you need to replace a blown fuse.

*[SV43200(ALL)03/94] The spare fuses for your vehicle are color coded as follows:10 amp — red, 15 amp — light blue, 20 amp — natural, 30amp — light green.

*[SV43300(ALL)06/95] 2. On the fuse panel cover, find the number of the fuse youwant to check. The diagram on the cover tells you where tolocate the fuse on the panel.

*[SV43400(ALL)06/95] 3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look through the clearside of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. Ifit is, the fuse is blown and should be replaced.

[SV43500(ALL)04/94]

7-1/2 pica art:0021196-A

The side view of a fuse



389

*[SV43600(ALL)06/95] 4. Replace the fuse with one that has the right amperage rating(see previous chart).



*[SV43800(ALL)06/95] 5. Put the fuse panel cover back on.

*[SV44000(ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to blow if you donot find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues toblow, have your electrical system checked.

%*[SV44050(ALL)10/94] Relays

[SV44060(ALL)10/94] Relays are devices which recieve signals from components orsystems. After receiving signals, relays transfer these signals toactivate or deactivate other components or systems.


390

[SV

44

13

0(

X)1

0/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

90

14

3-C

Relays

andtheir

locations

File:15unsvx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996

Servicing

Your

Explorer391

[SV

44

14

0(

X)1

0/9

4]

33-1

/2pica

art:00

21

11

8-C

Relays

andtheir

locations

File:15unsvx.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996

392

%*[SV44600(ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement

*[SV44700(ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lightsfrequently:

*[SV44800(ALL)01/95] ■ headlamps

*[SV44850(ALL)02/95] ■ high-mount brakelamp

*[SV44900(ALL)01/95] ■ tail lamps

*[SV45000(ALL)01/95] ■ brakelamps

*[SV45100(ALL)01/95] ■ hazard flasher

*[SV45200(ALL)01/95] ■ turn signals

*[SV45300(ALL)01/95] ■ license plate lamp

*[SV45350(ALL)02/95] ■ fog lamps

%*[SV45400(ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if:

*[SV45500(ALL)01/95] ■ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to turn off yourvehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beamson

*[SV45600(ALL)01/95] ■ the headlamps do not seem to give you enough light to seeclearly at night

*[SV45700(ALL)01/95] ■ the headlamp beams are pointed substantially away from aposition slightly down and to the right



393

%*[SV45800(ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb

*[SV45900(ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs. When thelamp burns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the wholelamp.


Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep outof children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plasticbase and do not touch the glass. The oil from your handcould cause the bulb to break the next time theheadlamps are operated.

*[SV46050(ALL)12/91] NOTE: If the bulb is accidently touched, it should be cleanedwith rubbing alcohol before being used.

*[SV46100(ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you can immediatelyreplace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extendedperiod of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.

[SV46200(ALL)04/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021197-AParts of a headlamp


394

*[SV46300(ALL)03/95] Removing the headlamp bulb

*[SV46400(ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.

[SV46501( X)05/95] 2. Lift the hood, open the hinged headlamp cover, and behindthe headlamp remove the electrical connector by graspingthe wires and pulling rearward.

*[SV46700(ALL)04/95] 3. Remove the bulb retaining ring by turning it 1/8 of a turn tofree it from the socket. Then slide the ring off the plasticbase. Keep the ring. You must use it again to hold the newbulb in place.

*[SV46800(ALL)04/95] 4. Carefully remove the bulb assembly from its socket bygently pulling it rearward without turning.

*[SV46900(ALL)03/95] Installing the headlamp bulb

*[SV47000(ALL)02/95] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward,insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You mayneed to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves inthe plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When thegrooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until theplastic base contacts the rear of the socket.

*[SV47100(ALL)08/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until itcontacts the rear of the socket. Lock the ring into the socketby rotating it clockwise until you feel a “stop.”

*[SV47200(ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic baseuntil it snaps, locking it into position.

*[SV47300(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they workproperly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before youchanged the bulb, you should not need to align it again.



395

*[SV47401( X)02/95] Map Lamp Bulb (Overhead Console)

*[SV47402( X)03/93] To remove the lens, pry with a small screwdriver as shown:

[SV47403( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021199-ARemoving the lens

*[SV47404( X)03/93] To remove the bulbs, use a screwdriver or coin to push up androtate counterclockwise 90˚. The bulb and bulb holder will thendrop out from the lamp as shown:

[SV47405( X)10/94]

10-1/2 pica

art:0021200-ARemoving bulb


396

[SV47415(ALL)01/95] Tail Lamp Bulb

[SV47420(ALL)01/95] Removing the tail lamp bulb

[SV47445( X)10/94] 1. Remove the two (2) screws retaining rear lamp to vehicle.

[SV47450( X)10/94] 2. Remove rear lamp by pulling rearward to disengage twolower barbed retainers.

[SV47455( X)10/94] 3. Remove socket from lamp.

[SV47460( X)10/94] 4. Remove bulb from socket.

[SV47465(ALL)01/95] Installing the tail lamp bulb

[SV47490( X)10/94] 1. Install bulb in socket.

[SV47495( X)10/94] 2. Install socket to lamp.

[SV47500( X)10/94] 3. Align lower barbed retainers and install lamp to vehicle.

[SV47505( X)10/95] 4. Install two (2) lamp retaining screws.



397

[SV47515( X)10/94]

24 pica art:0021370-A

Replacing the tail lamp bulb


398

*[SV47625(ALL)03/95] Bulb Specifications

[SV47825( X)05/95]

thirty-four pica

chart:0090186-A



399

[SV47875( X)04/94]

eight pica

chart:0020633-G

*[SV48400(ALL)10/90] Rear lighting wire functions

[SV48500(ALL)04/94]

eight pica

chart:0021201-A

%*[SV48600(ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

*[SV48700(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter whichenables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emissionrequirements.

*[SV48800(ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emissioncontrol parts continue to work properly:

*[SV48900(ALL)01/95] ■ Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV49000(ALL)01/95] ■ Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV49100(ALL)01/95] ■ Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving,especially at high speeds.

*[SV49200(ALL)03/95] ■ Have the services listed in your Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet performed according to the specified schedule.


400


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass orother dry ground cover. The emission system heats upthe engine compartment and exhaust system, which canstart a fire.


On vehicles without original equipment floor covering orinsulation, do not let passengers ride in your truck in amanner that allows contact between skin and the metalfloor.

*[SV49500(ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure,the charge warning light, the check engine light, or thetemperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that theemission system is not working properly.

*[SV49600(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle orengine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach theexhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[SV49700(ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases,trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permittedto intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent itfrom working. In some of the United States and in Canada,vehicle owners may be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.



401

*[SV49800(ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when you service yourvehicle. If the metal collector contacts any of your vehicle’splastic trim or bumper parts they could melt or deform.

*[SV49900(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. Seeyour dealer if the engine runs on for more than five secondsafter you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[SV50000(ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is onthe Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on ornear the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement andgives some tune-up specifications.

%*[SV51475(ALL)07/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing

*[SV51480(ALL)07/95] In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic(OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its batteryhas just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not readyfor I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the lawspecifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway drivingto complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all ofthe OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBDII system is set to the ready condition. The amount of drivingrequired to reach the ready condition varies with individualdriving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below.If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do theadditional driving required by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work.

*[SV51485(ALL)09/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

*[SV51490(ALL)06/95] The following steps must be run in the order shown. If anysteps are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safedriving mode is acceptable between steps.

*[SV51495(ALL)06/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to trafficconditions and obey all traffic laws.


402

*[SV51500(ALL)07/95] The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperaturebefore proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD IIDrive Cycle.

*[SV51505(ALL)06/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for 4minutes.

[SV51510(ALL)05/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for automatic transmissions)for 40 seconds.

[SV51515(ALL)05/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h) (for manualtransmissions upshift from 1st to 5th gear, but hold in 2ndfor at least 5 seconds) at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.

*[SV51520(ALL)05/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph(72 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th gear) for 30seconds.

*[SV51525(ALL)08/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual transmissions)for 40 seconds.

*[SV51530(ALL)05/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speedsbetween 25 and 40 mph (40-64 km/h) (manual transmissionsprimarily drive vehicles in 3rd and 4th gear when possible)for 15 minutes. During the 15 minute drive cycle thefollowing modes must be achieved:

[SV51535(ALL)05/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each.

[SV51540(ALL)05/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and

[SV51545(ALL)05/95] c. choose three different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady statethrottle drives.



403

[SV51550(ALL)06/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph(72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions upshift to 5th gear).This should take approximately 8 seconds.

*[SV51555(ALL)05/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selectedspeed between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manualtransmissions use 5th gear) for approximately 5 minutes.

*[SV51560(ALL)05/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between 45and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5thgear).

*[SV51565(ALL)05/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive (manualtransmissions use 5th gear) for 40 seconds.

*[SV51570(ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can beturned off when convenient.


404

*[SV51575(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, andLubricant Specifications

[SV52050( X)12/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0090164-C



405

%*[SV52800(ALL)05/95] Motorcraft Parts

[SV53150( X)06/95]

18 pica chart:0090205-A


406

%*[SV53500(ALL)05/95] Lubricant Specifications

[SV54250( X)10/95]

thirty-two pica

chart:0090113-B



407

[SV54350( X)03/95]

thirty pica

chart:0090114-A


408

[SV54425( X)03/95]

twenty pica

chart:0090115-A

%*[SV56000(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV56100(ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV56150(ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period oftime (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenancerecommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[SV56200(ALL)01/95] General

*[SV56300(ALL)01/95] ■ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV56400(ALL)01/95] ■ Protect from sunlight, if possible.



409

*[SV56500(ALL)01/95] ■ If vehicles are stored outside, they require regularmaintenance to protect against rust and damage.

*[SV56600(ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV56700(ALL)01/95] ■ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar ormud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing andunderside of front fenders.

*[SV56800(ALL)01/95] ■ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.

*[SV56900(ALL)01/95] ■ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.

*[SV57000(ALL)01/95] ■ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat ofauto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary whenthe vehicle is washed.

*[SV57100(ALL)04/95] ■ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges and latcheswith a light grade oil.

*[SV57200(ALL)01/95] ■ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV57300(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.

%*[SV57350(ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV57400(ALL)01/95] ■ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reachesnormal operating temperature.

*[SV57500(ALL)01/95] ■ With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gearswhile the engine is running.

%*[SV57600(ALL)01/95] Fuel system

%*[SV57700(ALL)07/94] ■ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the firstautomatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.

*[SV57900(ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days ormore), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers in the fuel systemand may also clog small orifices.


410

*[SV58000(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual orexpected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructionson the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speedto circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.

*[SV58100(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system willprotect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Followthe instructions packaged with the product.

%*[SV58200(ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV58300(ALL)01/95] ■ Protect against freezing temperatures.

%*[SV58400(ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV58500(ALL)01/95] ■ Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV58600(ALL)01/95] ■ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat ofgrease.

%*[SV58700(ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV58800(ALL)01/95] ■ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.

%*[SV58900(ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV59000(ALL)05/95] ■ Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV59100(ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV59200(ALL)01/95] ■ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins undervehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.

*[SV59300(ALL)03/95] ■ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days tolubricate working parts and prevent corrosion.


411

[QI0

00

10

(X

)05

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090184-A

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

412

[QI0

31

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090212-A

Frontexterior

view

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

413

[QI0

37

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090110-B

Rear

exteriorview

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

414

[QI0

43

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090112-B

Entrance

view

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

415

[QI0

49

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090213-A

Driver’s

door

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

416

[QI0

55

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090195-B

Instrument

panel

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

417

[QI0

61

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090105-B

Instrument

cluster

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

418

[QI0

65

00

(X

)09

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090193-A

Rear

cargoarea

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

419

[QI0

77

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090151-B

The

4.0Lengine

compartm

ent

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

420

[QI0

78

00

(X

)07

/95

]

fullpage

art:0090136-A

The

5.0Lengine

compartm

ent

File:16unqix.exU

pdate:T

hu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996

Index

421

AAccessory position on the ignition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Accessory power source, power point outlet . . . . . . . 204Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Air bag supplemental restraint system

and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–27, 52description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 28disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 28indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26service and information labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 32wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Air cleaner filterlocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Air suspension, check air ride system warning,message center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Alarm, activating remote personal. . . . . . . . . . . . 162All wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Ambulance packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system). . . 207, 213, 241Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263see also Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Anti-theft systemarming the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167disarming an untriggered system . . . . . . . . . . . 168disarming a triggered system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

File:unixx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996

422

Anti-theft system (continued)triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) . . . . . . . . . 319Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . . . . . . . . 317Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . 207Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . . . . . 128, 132Autolock (see Keyless entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Automatic transaxle, fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . 406Automatic transmission

driving an automatic overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . 248fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374fluid, specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Axlelubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 363

BBacking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Battery

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 295, 372–373battery saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371jumping a disabled battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372replacement, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371voltage gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410


423

Index

Brake fluidbrake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Brakelamp, high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . . . . 134Brakes

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406front disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261if brakes do not grip well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377new brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266power braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 377stopping distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 267trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Brights (high beams) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 136Built-in child seat

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Bulbs, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393


424

CCanada, customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . 52Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound system) . . 214, 226Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Child safety restraints

built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Child safety seatsand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 52attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . . . 13, 52built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 52in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52tether anchorage hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Chimeheadlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Circuit breakers, see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Cleaning your vehicle

built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132


425

Index

Cleaning your vehicle (continued)instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 110interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133leather seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 229, 241Clutch

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376operation while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251recommended shift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Combination lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 11Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . 209Compass, electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Compass/temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Controls

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 191power seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135


426

Convenience kit in cargo area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Coolant (see Engine coolant)

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Crankcase emission filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Cruise control (see Speed control). . . . . . . . . . . . 141Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada . . . . . . 324

DDashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Defrost

rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 373, 375engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Driveline universal joint and slip yoke . . . . . . . . . 377Driving under special conditions

bad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271high speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269tips for safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272


427

Index

EElectrical system

fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 388operating when the engine is off . . . . . . . . . . . . 67power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Electronic message center (see Message center) . . . . . . . 96Electronic sound system

accessory delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213atenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241tuning the radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 223, 238warranty and service information . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Electronic stereo cassette radio (see Electronicsound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 222

Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic sound system) . 209, 222Emergencies, roadside

assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 373fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Emission control system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 399

Enginecheck engine warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 74fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 70–71fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336


428

Engine (continued)starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 71starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408–409

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 351, 375drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336refill procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Engine coolant temperature gaugedescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Engine coolant temperature guage:electronic . . . . . . . . 92Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Engine:idle speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Engine oil

changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 351checking and adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 351, 375engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 406synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Entry systemilluminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166keyless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161


429

Index

Exhaust fumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

FFan, engine fan, avoiding injury. . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Federal Communications Commission . . . . . . . . . . 243Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Ford Extended Service Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . . . . . . 324Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Four-Wheel Drive vehicles

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256driving off road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259special notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Four-wheeling with Ford supplement . . . . . . . . . . . 4French owner guides, how to obtain. . . . . . . . . . . . 3Fuel

calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 346choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates. . . . . 347filling your vehicle with fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . 339–340fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91improving fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . 344storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344


430

Fuel capremoving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339, 341

Fuel filler dooroverride, manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340remote release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Fuel pump shut-off switch

engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Fuse panelsinstrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388power distribution box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Fusescharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 388checking and replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

GGas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . . . . . . . 99, 342, 346Gasoline (see Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Gauges, Electronic

engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 92fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Gauges, Mechanicalbattery voltage gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 92engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94


431

Index

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 276driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 276

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246column-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246floor-mounted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251gearshift override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247locking the gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Gearshift:shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 275driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

HHazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Headlamps

aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392autolamp system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392–393turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91


432

High beamsindicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 136

High-mount brakelamp, description . . . . . . . . . . . 134High-mount brakelamp:location. . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Hitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Hood

latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335lubrication specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335working under the hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

IIdentification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 318Idle

relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 334, 372speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Ignitionchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . . . . . . . . 79Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 52Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Instrument panel

lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . 132location of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Integrated child seat (see Built-in child seat) . . . . . . . . 34Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136


433

Index

JJack

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 307positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 307storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

KKeyless entry system

autolock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159locking and unlocking doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158programming entry code. . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 157

Keyskey in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67removing from the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

LLamps

autolamp delay system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . 132flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136high-mount brakelamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190instrument panel, dimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132


434

Lamps (continued)interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 132replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . . . . . . . 135Lights, warning and indicator

air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81charging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104oil pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90overdrive off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82service engine soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88turn signal indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Load limitsGAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Lug nuts

standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

MMaintenance schedule and record (see separate Maintenance

Schedule and Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . 3Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Manual transmission

clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 376fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406


435

Index

Manual transmission (continued)shifting gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251shift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Master cylinder, brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Message center

low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104system check button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Methanol in fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Mileage, calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 346Mirrors

automatic dimming rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . 188dual electric remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188side view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188side view mirrors (power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

NNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . 323New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

OOctane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Odometer

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Off road driving, 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351, 405Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . . . . . . . . 401


436

Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Overhead console

compass/temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 197map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

PPanic alarm feature, remote entry system . . . . . . . . 162Parking brake

operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Power distribution box (see Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . 386Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 191moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171–172

Power point electrical outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Power steering

dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379driving with power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

RRadio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . . . . . . . . 207Rear axle

lubricant specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 363

Rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171


437

Index

Rear window (continued)defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Regulations, National Highway TrafficSafety Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Remote entry system

arming and disarming the anti-theft system . . . . . . 162illuminated entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162replacement/additional transmitters . . . . . . . . . . 166replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)

adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 52

Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

SSafe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 290Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . 344Safety restraints

adjusting the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 14, 19automatic locking mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . . . . . 13cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21for adults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32


438

Safety restraints (continued)for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 52for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 11maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 24warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Safety seats for childrenand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 52–53attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . . . 13, 52built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52tether anchorage hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Seat belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seats

adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174adjusting the seats, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186reclining the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174seatback release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Service concerns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Servicing your vehicle

precautions when servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Shift positions (see Gearshift) . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . 9, 11Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . . 11, 14Side mirrors

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . . . . . . . . 192


439

Index

Snowplowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Spare tire

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 304conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 301finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 307temporary spare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Special notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

E-4WD vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4utility-type vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Specification chart, lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Speed control

accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144canceling a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72starting your vehicle if the battery is disabled . . . . . 295

Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Steering wheel

horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Storage compartments, overhead storage compartment . . 201


440

Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Sunroof (moon roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . . . . . . . . 83Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . 24

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

mechanical cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Tail lamps

bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Temperature control (see Climate control) . . . . . . . . 110Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints). . . . . . . 64Tilt steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Tires

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 301storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366wear bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . . . . . . . . 272Towing your vehicle

using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 363Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 363Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272


441

Index

Trailer towingcalculating maximum trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . 277safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Transaxleautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Transaxle control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Transfer case, fluid checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Transmission

automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . . . . . . . . 374fluid, checking and adding (manual) . . . . . . . . . 376lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Transmission control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

UUsed engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 351, 375

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal . . . . 401Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . 318Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277understanding loading information . . . . . . . . . . 271

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408


442

Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) . . . . . . 110Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . . . . . . . . 87, 89

WWarm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Warning chimes

headlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Warranties

basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Washer fluid

rear window reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 406Wheel bearings lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 406Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Wheels

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 307inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Windowsmanual windows, operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171one-touch down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172power windows, operating. . . . . . . . . . . . 171–172rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126


443

Index

Windshielddefrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Windshield washer fluid and wiperschecking and adding fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358checking and replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 360liftgate reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358low washer fluid light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358, 406variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311


444

Service Station Information

[GS00200( X)01/96]

twenty-four pica

chart:0090145-D

File:17ungsx.exUpdate:Thu Feb 29 09:20:59 1996

96 explorer

Documents